JP7461074B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine equipped with a presentation control means for controlling presentations.

For example, in a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, when a game ball enters the starting hole, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and after displaying special symbols in a variable manner, a special game that shows the result of the above determination is made. The pattern will be stopped and displayed. Some gaming machines of this type perform a preliminary determination process on whether or not to execute a special game in response to the reservation of the right to determine whether or not to execute a special game. There is an icon changing effect that changes the color of a pending icon based on the result of the above (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-39398 A

However, the effects produced by conventional gaming machines are not necessarily entertaining enough, and there is a demand for further improvements in entertaining.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can perform highly entertaining performances.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is as follows:
a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player;
special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means is
A winning notification effect for notifying that the determining means has determined that the special game has been executed; a first expectation presentation for making the user expect that the winning notification effect will be executed; A second expected performance that makes you look forward to it, a first ready-to-reach performance, a second ready-to-reach performance in which the hit notification performance is easier to execute than the first reach performance, and a hit notification performance in which the hit notification performance is more likely to be executed than the second reach performance. It is possible to perform the third reach performance,
During the execution of the first expected performance, there is a first time when the performance content of the first expected performance does not change from the first performance content, and a first time when the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to a second performance. A second time when the content of the first expected production changes from the first production content to the second production content and then changes to the third production content. There is a third time of change,
A second probability that the second expected performance will start at the third time is higher than a first probability that the second expected performance will start at the first time ,
The performance control means is
At the first time, the first reach effect is executed, at the second time, the second reach effect is executed, and at the third time, the second expected effect and the third reach effect are executed. It is possible to do
The second expected performance is a suggestion performance that suggests that the third reach performance will be executed,
The performance control means is
When the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed, the third reach effect is always executed after that,
At the first time, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect after starting the first reach effect, and at the second time, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect after starting the second reach effect. It is characterized by the fact that it is possible to

According to this invention, it is possible to perform highly entertaining performances.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 Enlarged view of main display 40 in FIG. 2 FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening and closing control of the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory diagram to explain jackpot random numbers and pattern random numbers Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1 An explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of various effects such as reach effects in a normal gaming state. Screen diagram illustrating the performance in the normal gaming state (Part 1) Screen diagram illustrating the performance in the normal gaming state (Part 2) FIG. 13 is a screen diagram showing an example of a presentation in which a V-winning is announced during a big win game. An explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of composite expectation performance An explanatory diagram to explain the characteristics of character waiting performances and special cut-ins and the reliability of big wins. Screen diagram to explain related effects An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of related effects A flowchart for explaining the execution period of various related performances An explanatory diagram to explain the flow of a series of subjugation reaches. An explanatory diagram to explain the lottery performed according to the operation during subjugation reach. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining pre-determination information; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining provisional loss information and provisional win information. Diagram showing a specific example of icon change production using a hold icon Special chart 2: Screen showing a specific example of a jackpot suggestion effect in reserve Explanatory diagram to explain the flow of chance production and suggestion production An explanatory diagram to explain the jackpot reliability and characteristics of chance effects and suggestive effects A screen diagram showing a specific example of the sense of discomfort notification effect A FIG. 13 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the incongruity miss notification effect B. FIG. 13 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the incongruity miss notification effect C. Explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 Detailed flow chart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 29 Detailed flowchart of special 2 advance judgment processing in step S210 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special 1 preliminary determination process in step S218 of FIG. 30 Detailed flow chart of special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 33 Detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 33 Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 29 (Part 1) Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 29 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the big winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 29 (Part 3) A flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the sub-control board 90. Detailed flow chart of the command receiving process in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of pending command reception processing in step S13 of FIG. 41 A flowchart illustrating the process of suggesting a big win in the special chart 2 reservation Detailed flow chart of fluctuation start command reception processing in step S16 of FIG. 41 Detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 44 Detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 44 Detailed flowchart of the special cut-in effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the character standby effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the defeat effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the chance production pattern setting process in step S168 of FIG. 46 Detailed flowchart of the suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S169 of FIG. 46 Detailed flowchart of related effect pattern setting process in step S171 of FIG. 46 Detailed flowchart of the operation reception process in step S30 of FIG. 40 (Part 1) Detailed flowchart of operation reception processing in step S30 of FIG. 40 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart (part 3) of the operation acceptance process in step S30 of FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the image and sound control board 100. Detailed flowchart of image display control processing in step S71 of FIG. 56

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Configuration example of gaming machine 1]
First, a configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Here, Figure 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1, and Figure 2 is a front view of the gaming board 2. As shown in Figures 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 attached within the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 is configured to include a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main frame for attaching the gaming board 2, etc., and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to an island facility of a hall. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged parallel to the gaming board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the gaming board 2 form a gaming area 3 in which gaming balls can flow down.

1, the front frame 31 is provided with a launch handle 32 for launching game balls, an upper tray 33 for storing game balls to be supplied to a launching device (not shown), and a lower tray 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 33. When a player grips the launch handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the game balls stored in the upper tray 33 are guided to the launching device and launched with a launch strength according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 32. The launched game ball moves along a rail member 4 located on the left side of the play area 3, and is guided to an upper position of the play area 3, where it flows down the play area 3 along the play board 2 while changing its moving direction by coming into contact with play nails, windmills, etc. provided in the play area 3.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, which prevents a game ball that has entered the play area 3 from returning to the launching device. A stop button is also provided in close proximity to the launch handle 32, and the player can temporarily stop the launch of the game ball by operating this stop button without returning the launch handle 32 to its initial position.

When the player rotates the launch handle 32 by a small rotation angle to perform a "left hit," the game ball is launched with a relatively weak launch strength, and this game ball flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player rotates the launch handle 32 by a large rotation angle to perform a "right hit," the game ball is launched with a relatively strong launch strength, and this game ball flows down the right game area 3R after moving along the rail member 4 located in the upper right corner of the center decorative body 10.

In the left game area 3L, the path through which the game ball passes is provided with a first start opening 21, a second start opening 22, an opening/closing member 23, and three general winning openings 24 as devices related to winning and judgment (see FIG. 2). In addition, in the right game area 3R, the path through which the game ball passes is provided with the second start opening 22, the opening/closing member 23, one general winning opening 24, a gate 25, a first large winning opening 26, an opening/closing member 27, a second large winning opening 28, and an opening/closing member 29 as devices related to winning and judgment (see FIG. 2).

The game balls launched from the launching device may enter any of the first start opening 21, the second start opening 22, the general winning opening 24, the first large winning opening 26, and the second large winning opening 28 as they flow down the game area 3 along the game board 2. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the winning location are paid out to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34. For example, four prize balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the first start opening 21, one prize ball is paid out every time one game ball enters the second start opening 22, and five prize balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the general winning opening 24. Also, ten prize balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the first large winning opening 26, and ten prize balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the second large winning opening 28. Any balls that do not win are discharged from the game area 3 through a discharge port formed at the bottom end of the game board 2.

A center ornament 10 is provided in the opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This center ornament 10 is composed of a stage section 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll, and a warp section 12 having a warp entrance and a warp exit at both ends. A game ball flowing down the left game area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and this game ball is discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove is formed in the center position of the left and right sides of the stage section 11, which allows the game ball rolling on the stage section 11 to fall toward the first starting opening 21. For this reason, a game ball guided to the stage section 11 through the warp section 12 is more likely to enter the first starting opening 21 than a game ball flowing down the left game area 3L without passing through the warp section 12.

The first starting port 21 is a starting area that is always open. The second starting port 22 is a starting area that is normally closed when the opening/closing member 23 as an electric accessory is not operating, and is opened when the opening/closing member 23 is operated. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player. Then, on a first special symbol display 41 (or a second special symbol display 42), which will be described later, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a symbol (a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) indicating the result of the above determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game is executed in which the first jackpot 26 and the second jackpot 28 are opened.

In addition, in the following explanation, the determination executed in response to the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening 21 will be referred to as the "first special symbol determination", and the determination executed in response to the winning of a gaming ball in the second starting opening 22 as "first special symbol determination". The determination made by the player will be referred to as the "second special symbol determination," and these will be collectively referred to as the "special symbol determination."

The first large prize opening 26 is a special prize area that is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 27, which is a plate that opens and closes the first large prize opening 26, is provided at the opening of the first large prize opening 26. The first large prize opening 26 is usually blocked by the opening/closing member 27, which maintains a closed position that forms the same plane as the game board 2. In contrast, when the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), a jackpot game is executed in which the opening/closing member 27 is operated to open the first large prize opening 26. During this jackpot game, a long open round game is played in which the opening/closing member 27 maintains an open position (see FIG. 2) that opens the first large prize opening 26 and then returns to a closed position that blocks the first large prize opening 26. The long open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is opened continues until a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the first large prize opening 26 or until a predetermined time (e.g., 25 seconds) has elapsed since the first large prize opening 26 was opened (without the predetermined number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 26). In this way, during the jackpot game, a long open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is long open is played. For this reason, by hitting to the right during the long open round game in which the first large prize opening 26 is long open, the player can obtain more prize balls than when the jackpot game is not being played.

The second major winning hole 28 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 29, which is a blade member that opens and closes the second big winning hole 28, is provided at the opening of the second big winning hole 28. The second big prize opening 28 is normally closed by this opening/closing member 29 (see FIG. 4(A)). On the other hand, when the first special symbol (or second special symbol) as a jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 29 is activated. A jackpot game is executed in which the second jackpot opening 28 is opened. During this jackpot game, the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position of opening the second big prize opening 28 (see FIGS. 2, 4(B) and (C)), and then closes the second big winning opening 28. A round game is played in which the player returns to the closed position.

As will be detailed later, in the round game in which the second grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed, the second grand prize opening 28 is set such that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can easily enter the second grand prize opening 28. A long-open round game in which the opening 28 is left open for a long time, and a short-open round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a short time so that it is extremely difficult for a game ball to enter the second big prize opening 28 are prepared. There is. In a long open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened long, 100 prize balls (=10 balls x 10 counts) are paid out by the player hitting right. Therefore, by hitting the right ball during the long open round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened long, the player can obtain more prize balls than when no jackpot game is being played. .

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game, the operations of the opening/closing member 27 and the opening/closing member 29 are controlled, allowing the player to obtain game balls as game media. A jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, for the short-open round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is briefly opened, the opening time during which the opening/closing member 29 maintains the open position that opens the second large prize opening 28 is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds. For this reason, even if the player hits to the right during the short-open round game of the second large prize opening 28, the game ball will not enter the second large prize opening 28, and no prize balls will be paid out.

For convenience of explanation, FIG. 2 shows an example in which the opening/closing members 27 and 29 are in an open position to open the big prize openings 26 and 28 when the effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. Although the opening/closing members 27 and 29 are not in the open position during the fluctuating display of the performance symbols. In addition, in each round game in the jackpot game, either the first big winning hole 26 or the second big winning hole 28 is used, so in reality, these big winning holes are used at the same time as shown in FIG. It will never be released.

An opening/closing member 23 (see FIG. 2) is disposed adjacent to the second starting port 22. This opening/closing member 23 can change its position between a closed position in which the opening/closing member 23 blocks the second starting port 22 and an open position (see FIG. 2) in which the opening/closing member 23 opens the second starting port 22.

The second starting hole 22 is normally blocked by the opening/closing member 23. In contrast, when a game ball hit by a player to the right passes through the gate 25, a decision is made as to whether or not to open the second starting hole 22, although no prize balls are paid out. If it is decided that the second starting hole 22 should be opened, the opening/closing member 23 maintains an open position for a predetermined period of time and then returns to a closed position a predetermined number of times. In this way, the second starting hole 22 is in a state where it is difficult for game balls to pass through when the opening/closing member 23 is not operating, but is in a state where it is easy for game balls to pass through when the opening/closing member 23 is operating.

In the following explanation, the determination that is performed when the gaming ball passes through gate 25 will be referred to as the "normal symbol determination."

The general winning opening 24 is always open, just like the first starting opening 21, and is a winning opening from which a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 5 balls) are paid out when a game ball enters the general winning opening 24. However, unlike the first starting opening 21, etc., no judgment is made even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 24.

[Example of configuration of main display 40]
Fig. 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in Fig. 2. As illustrated in Fig. 3, the main display 40 includes a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol reserve display 44, a second special symbol reserve display 45, a normal symbol reserve display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, a launch direction display 49, and the like.

The first special pattern display 41 is configured with eight LEDs indicated by "i-p", and when a first special pattern determination is made, it notifies the result of the first special pattern determination by displaying a varying pattern and then displaying a static pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination. Specifically, for example, the eight LEDs are turned on in sequence to display a varying pattern, and the LEDs are turned on in a combination according to the result of the first special pattern determination for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) to display a static pattern.

The second special symbol display 42 is configured with eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and when the second special symbol determination is performed, the symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the second special symbol is displayed. The determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, by sequentially lighting up the eight LEDs mentioned above, a variable display of symbols is performed, and each LED is activated for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 The pattern is stopped and displayed by turning it on (seconds).

The first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) displays a "jackpot symbol" indicating a jackpot, or a "miss symbol" indicating a miss, as a symbol indicating the result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination). Note that the gaming machine 1 provides multiple jackpot symbols that differ depending on the type of jackpot, and when a jackpot symbol is displayed, a jackpot game is played in which the first jackpot opening 26 and the second jackpot opening 28 are opened in an opening pattern that corresponds to the type of jackpot symbol.

The normal symbol display 43 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "s to t", and when a normal symbol determination is performed, it displays the symbols in a variable manner and then displays the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The determination result of the normal symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol. Specifically, for example, the above two LEDs are alternately lit to display a variable pattern, and each LED is turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a lighting mode according to the determination result of the normal symbol determination. By lighting it up, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state. Here, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, an auxiliary game is performed in which the second starting port 22 is opened by operating the opening/closing member 23 in an opening pattern according to the current game state.

In the following explanation, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 will be referred to as "special symbols," and the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 43 will be referred to as "normal symbols." shall be called. In addition, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 is referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as the "second special symbol". There may be a distinction.

The first special symbol pending indicator 44 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "u-v" and displays the number of pending first special symbol determinations depending on the lighting state of these LEDs. The second special symbol pending indicator 45 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "w-x" and displays the number of pending second special symbol determinations depending on the lighting state of these LEDs. Note that in this embodiment, the upper limit of these pending numbers is set to "4" for both. The regular symbol pending indicator 46 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "q-r" and displays the number of pending regular symbol determinations depending on the lighting state of these LEDs.

The round display 47 is used in a jackpot game that is executed according to a jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Displays the number of rounds indicating how many round games will be executed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a jackpot game including three round games is executed, a jackpot game including five round games is executed, and a jackpot game including a ten round game. There are cases where this is executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the round indicator 47 is configured to include a 3R LED, a 5R LED, and a 10R LED, and when any of these LEDs lights up, the number of rounds is indicated. be notified.

The game status indicator 48 is composed of three LEDs indicated by "a1 to a3," and indicates the game status of the gaming machine 1 according to the lighting state of these LEDs. The launch direction indicator 49 is composed of two LEDs indicated by "y to z," and indicates the launch direction of the gaming ball according to the lighting state of these LEDs. In other words, it indicates whether the state is for a left hit or a right hit.

[Example of configuration of presentation means included in gaming machine 1]
1 and 2, the game board 2 and the front frame 31 are provided with a decorative member 13, a movable decorative member 14, a frame lamp 37, a speaker 38, a performance display 125, a performance first special chart reserve display 126, a performance second special chart reserve display 127, and the like, for performing various performances. In addition, an image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2.

The decorative member 13 incorporates a panel lamp 5 (see Figure 5) that is composed of multiple LEDs, and various light effects can be created by changing the lighting and blinking patterns of each LED, or by changing the color of the light emitted by each LED.

The movable decorative member 14 is disposed in front of the image display device 7 and behind the decorative member 13. The movable decorative member 14 has a plurality of built-in LEDs, and the movable decorative member 14 performs a predetermined performance by the movement of the movable decorative member 14 itself and/or light. In this embodiment, a predetermined space in which the movable decorative member 14 can operate is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 of the image display device 7, and the movable decorative member 14 is configured to be able to move up and down along the display screen 70. The movable decorative member 14 is usually disposed in an initial position (see FIG. 2) where most of it is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. In contrast, when a notice performance with a relatively high probability of a jackpot is executed using the image display device 7 and the speaker 38, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern and falls to an operating position that covers most of the display screen 70.

The frame lamp 37 is made up of multiple LEDs built into various places on the front frame 31, and various lighting effects can be created by changing the lighting or blinking pattern of each LED or by changing the color of the light emitted by each LED.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays a presentation image on its display screen 70, and the player can view the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This display screen 70 displays presentation images including various display objects such as presentation patterns that notify the results of the special pattern determination, characters and items, reserved images (reserved icons) that are displayed in the same number as the reserved number of the first special pattern determination (or the second special pattern determination), and change suggestion images (relevant icons) that suggest that the special pattern is being displayed. Note that the image display device 7 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be other image display devices such as an EL display device, as long as it is capable of displaying presentation images.

The speaker 38 outputs performance sounds such as music, voices, and sound effects in synchronization with or asynchronously with the display performance performed on the display screen 70 to perform sound performance.

The effect display 125 is configured with two LEDs, and displays a varying pattern in accordance with the varying display of the special and effect patterns, and displays a stationary pattern that notifies the result of the special pattern determination in accordance with the stationary display of the special and effect patterns. This effect display 125 notifies the result of the special pattern determination by the combination of the on/off lighting of each LED and the lighting color.

The performance first special figure holding display 126 is configured with two LEDs, and depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED, the same number as that displayed on the first special figure holding display 44 is displayed. 1 Displays the number of pending special symbol judgments. The production second special figure holding display 127 is configured with two LEDs, and depending on the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED, the same number as that displayed on the second special figure holding display 45 is displayed. 2 Displays the number of pending special symbol judgments.

[Example of configuration of input means included in gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in Fig. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a first effect button 35 and a second effect button 36 as input means that can be input by the player. The first effect button 35 is a push button for inputting operation information by being pressed by the player. The second effect button 36 is a push button for inputting operation information by the player holding the gripping portion of the second effect button 36 and pressing the second effect button 36. In the gaming machine 1, effects may be performed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36.

Although not shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the first effect button 35 and the second effect button 36, an operation lever 98 is provided on the front frame 31. This operation lever 98 is configured with a grip and a lever button. When the player holds the grip, the grip can be tilted in any of a number of directions, including the front, back, left, and right. The lever button is provided at the top end of the grip, and when the player tilts the grip in any direction and presses the lever button with his or her thumb, operation information indicating that a direction has been selected (direction selection information) can be input. In addition, by pressing the lever button without tilting the grip from the initial position in any direction, operation information indicating that no direction has been selected (direction non-selection information) can be input.

The configuration of the input means is not limited to that exemplified in this embodiment, and may be other. That is, for example, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 1 is described as having three input means, but the number of input means may be one, two, or four or more. Furthermore, the input means is not limited to push buttons or operation levers, and may be other input means such as a touch panel capable of detecting touch operations by the player, or, for example, an optical sensor capable of detecting the player's hand held over the display screen 70.

[Example of internal configuration of second large prize opening 28]
4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening and closing control of the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287. An opening member 29 for opening and closing the second large prize opening 28 is provided at the opening of the second large prize opening 28 (see FIG. 1 and FIG. 4(A)). In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 4(A) to (C), a second large prize opening sensor 281, a V prize opening sensor 283, a discharge opening sensor 284, a slide member 285, etc. are provided inside the second large prize opening 28.

The second large prize opening sensor 281 detects a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 28, and in this embodiment, 10 prize balls are paid out each time a game ball passes through the second large prize opening sensor 281. The V prize opening sensor 283 detects the passage of a game ball through the V prize opening 287 (an example of a special prize winning area) defined by the V prize opening sensor 283. The discharge opening sensor 284 detects the passage of a game ball through the discharge opening defined by the discharge opening sensor 284. The slide member 285 guides a game ball that has passed through the second large prize opening sensor 281 to the V prize opening 287 or the discharge opening, and is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction (width direction of the gaming machine 1) in FIG. 4. Figures 4(A) and (B) show an example of a state in which the slide member 285 is positioned in a right position that blocks the V winning opening 287, and Figures 4(C) and (D) show an example of a state in which the slide member 285 is positioned in a left position that opens the V winning opening 287.

When a jackpot game is not being played or during a long open round game in which the first jackpot 26 is opened long, the second jackpot 28 is closed by the opening/closing member 29, and the V winning slot 287 is closed. It is closed by a slide member 285 (see FIG. 4(A)). On the other hand, in a round game in which the second big winning hole 28 is opened and closed, the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 can be in the following state.

Specifically, in a round game in which the second grand prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIGS. 4(A) and 4(B), the opening/closing member is 29 may rotate and the second big prize opening 28 may be in an open state. In this case, although the second grand prize opening 28 is open, the V winning opening 287 is still blocked by the slide member 285, so even if the game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28, the game ball It does not pass through the V prize opening 287 but passes through the discharge port sensor 284.

In addition, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in Figures 4 (B) and (C), the second large prize opening 28 may remain open as the slide member 285 moves from the right position to the left position, opening the V prize opening 287. In this case, since both the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are open, a game ball that enters the second large prize opening 28 passes through the V prize opening 287 (i.e., is detected by the V prize opening sensor 283).

The V entry port sensor 283 functions as a so-called guaranteed bonus switch, and as described above, if the game ball enters the V when both the second large entry port 28 and the V entry port 287 are open (the game ball is detected by the V entry port sensor 283), the game will be controlled in a "guaranteed bonus game state" described below after the jackpot game in which the V entry occurred ends. On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the V when both the second large entry port 28 and the V entry port 287 are open, the game will be controlled in a "time-saving game state" described below after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 28 is opened and closed, as illustrated in FIG. 4(D), the opening/closing member 29 is not operating, so the second large prize opening 28 is closed, and the slide member 285 moves from the right position to the left position, so the V prize opening 287 is open. In this case, although the V prize opening 287 is open, the second large prize opening 28 is in a difficult-to-enter state, so that no game balls can enter the second large prize opening 28.

The letter "V" is written in a position corresponding to the V prize opening sensor 283 on a transparent member provided in a position corresponding to the area containing the second large prize opening sensor 281, the V prize opening sensor 283, the outlet sensor 284, the slide member 285, etc. (see FIG. 2). Therefore, a player can easily identify the position of the V prize opening sensor 283 (the position of the V prize opening 287) by looking at this letter "V."

[Configuration of the control device provided in the gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1.
A control device for controlling the operation of the gaming machine 1 is provided on the back side of the game board 2. As illustrated in FIG. 5, the control device of the gaming machine 1 is composed of a main control board 80 for controlling the progress of a game using game balls, a sub-control board 90 for controlling the overall presentation based on information from the main control board 80, an image and sound control board 100 for controlling the presentation by images and sounds, a lamp control board 120 for controlling the presentation by various lamps and movable members, and the like. In this embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control unit for controlling the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 90, the image and sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 function as a presentation control unit for controlling the presentation. Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control board 90, the image and sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 may be composed of a single board.

<Configuration example of main control board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various arithmetic processing related to judgments and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on programs and the like stored in the main ROM 82. The main RAM 83 is used as a memory area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 81 executes the programs, and as a working area for data processing and the like.

The main control board 80 includes a first starting hole sensor 211, a second starting hole sensor 221, a gate sensor 251, a first big winning hole sensor 261, a second big winning hole sensor 281, a V winning hole sensor 283, and a discharge port sensor. 284, general winning hole sensor 241, second starting hole solenoid 222, first big winning hole solenoid 262, second big winning hole solenoid 282, and V winning hole solenoid 286 are connected. Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment includes four general winning opening sensors 241 corresponding to the four general winning openings 24, but in FIG. 5, for convenience of explanation, only one general winning opening sensor 241 is provided. It is written.

The first start hole sensor 211 detects that a game ball has entered the first start hole 21 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second start hole sensor 221 detects that a game ball has entered the second start hole 22 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects the passage of a game ball through the gate 25 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The first large prize hole sensor 261 detects that a game ball has entered the first large prize hole 26 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second large prize hole sensor 281 detects that a game ball has entered the second large prize hole 28 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The V prize hole sensor 283 detects that a game ball has entered the V prize hole 287 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The outlet sensor 284 detects the passage of a game ball through the outlet and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The general winning port sensor 241 detects that a game ball has entered the general winning port 24 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second start opening solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 23 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 23 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to open and close the second start opening 22. The first large prize opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 27 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 27 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to open and close the first large prize opening 26. The second large prize opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 29 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 29 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to open and close the second large prize opening 28. The V prize opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid connected to the slide member 285 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the slide member 285 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to open and close the V prize opening 287.

Although not shown in the figure, the game machine 1 supplies game balls to the upper tray 33 or the lower tray 34 by controlling a drive motor that sends game balls from a ball tank provided on the back side of the game board 2. Equipped with a payout control board. When the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 211, the second starting hole sensor 221, the first big winning hole sensor 261, the second big winning hole sensor 281, or the general winning hole sensor 241, The payout control board is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the location where the game balls have won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on information from the payout control board.

Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquired information at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 221 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Here, the various random numbers are specifically jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuating pattern random numbers.

The jackpot random number is a random number used to determine whether it is a jackpot or a miss. The pattern random number is a random number used to determine the type of jackpot (such as the number of rounds of jackpot play and the game state after the jackpot play ends) if it is determined to be a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number used to determine whether a reach performance or no reach performance will be performed if it is determined to be a miss. The change pattern random number is a random number used to determine the change pattern of the special pattern when the special pattern is displayed in a changing manner.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22), and first, the acquired jackpot random number is converted into a predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not the value matches the numerical value (winning value), it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Here, if it is determined to execute a jackpot game based on the jackpot random number matching the winning value, the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82 (compared with the symbol random number). ) The type of jackpot is determined based on which random number of predetermined random numbers matches.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines not to execute a jackpot game because the acquired jackpot random number does not match the winning value, it decides whether to perform a reach effect or a non-reach effect based on whether the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the main ROM 82 (which is compared with the reach random number). In addition, regardless of the result of the judgment based on the jackpot random number, the main CPU 81 decides the variation pattern of the special pattern when the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number. This determines the variation time of the special pattern.

When the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be played and determines the type of jackpot, it controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 26 (the operation of the opening and closing member 27) via the first large prize opening solenoid 262, the opening and closing of the second large prize opening 28 (the operation of the opening and closing member 29) via the second large prize opening solenoid 282, and the opening and closing of the V prize opening 287 (the operation of the slide member 285) via the V prize opening solenoid 286, in accordance with the type of jackpot, thereby playing a jackpot game according to the type of jackpot.

The main CPU 81 also obtains a random number (normal pattern random number) at the timing when a detection signal is input from the gate sensor 251, and executes a normal pattern determination using the obtained normal pattern random number. Then, if it is determined as a result of this normal pattern determination that the second start hole 22 is to be opened, the main CPU 81 executes an auxiliary game to open the second start hole 22 by controlling the opening and closing of the second start hole 22 (the operation of the opening and closing member 23) via the second start hole solenoid 222.

The main control board 80 is also connected to a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, a normal symbol display 43, a first special symbol reserved display 44, a second special symbol reserved display 45, a normal symbol reserved display 46, a round display 47, a game status display 48, and a launch direction display 49. The main CPU 81 controls these displays 41 to 49 that constitute the main display 40, and executes the display process described above based on FIG. 3.

<Configuration example of sub-control board 90>
The sub control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91 , a sub ROM 92 , a sub RAM 93 , and an RTC (real time clock) 94 . The sub CPU 91 performs arithmetic processing when controlling the effects based on a program stored in the sub ROM 92. The sub RAM 93 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 91 executes the above programs, and as a work area for data processing. The RTC 94 measures the current date and time (date and time).

The sub-control board 90 is connected to a first effect button detection sensor 96, a second effect button detection sensor 97, and an operation lever 98. When the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the first effect button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that to the sub-control board 90. When the second effect button 36 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the second effect button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that to the sub-control board 90. The operation lever 98 is configured with a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the direction in which the grip is tilted and the lever button, and when the operation lever 98 is operated, it outputs the direction selection information and direction non-selection information to the sub-control board 90 as operation information indicating that.

The sub CPU 91 sets performance contents (performance patterns) based on game information (various commands) related to special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot game, etc. transmitted from the main control board 80. At this time, input of operation information from the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 may be accepted, and the effect contents may be set in accordance with the operation information. The sub CPU 91 transmits a command to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 to instruct execution of the set performance contents.

<Configuration example of image sound control board 100>
The image and sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of sound effects by the speaker 38. In this embodiment, the image and sound control board 100 includes an image and sound control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an audio DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, Audio ROM108, SDRAM109, and an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of a mask ROM, and stores various tables such as the control program of the image/audio control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and a display list creation table used in the process of creating a display list. Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis, and includes various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) at which the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, the rotation angle, and the transparency. The control RAM 103 is used as a memory area for temporarily storing various data used when the image/audio control CPU 101 executes the above control program, and as a working area for data processing, etc.

The image sound control CPU 101 transmits the image data stored in the CGROM 105 to the VDP 104 to the image display device 7 based on the control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, commands received from the sub-control board 90, etc. Give instructions to display on the screen. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list. Further, the image sound control CPU 101 instructs the sound DSP 107 to output sound data stored in the sound ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

The CGROM 105 stores performance data necessary for executing variable performances associated with variable display of special symbols, performances associated with jackpot games, and the like. This CGROM 105 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, etc., and includes sprite data (one image data) consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels), and a plurality of image data. It compresses and stores movie data, etc. consisting of a collection of files. Note that the pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 105 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color.

Note that only a portion of the image data stored in CGROM 105 may be compressed. Movie data can be compressed using various known compression methods, such as MPEG4.

The VRAM 106 is composed of an SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and although not shown in the figure, it is composed of a display list memory area, a deployment memory area, a frame buffer, etc.

The display list memory area temporarily stores the display list output from the image/audio control CPU 101. The expansion memory area stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 105 and then expanded. The frame buffer is a frame buffer that is used for both drawing and displaying image data to be displayed on the display screen 70.

The VDP 104 expands the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 105 and stores the expanded image data in an expanded storage area. Further, the VDP 104 performs drawing processing on the frame buffer based on the display list stored in the display list storage area, using the image data stored in the expansion storage area. Further, the VDP 104 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the image display device 7.

An audio ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110 are connected to the audio DSP 107. The audio ROM 108 stores various types of audio data regarding songs, voices, sound effects, warning sounds, and the like. The SDRAM 109 is used as a work area for data processing, etc. by the audio DSP 107. The audio DSP 107 reads audio data corresponding to an instruction from the image audio control CPU 101 from the audio ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, executes data processing, and outputs the audio data after data processing to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume according to an instruction regarding the volume obtained from the image sound control CPU 101 via the audio DSP 107 and causes the speaker 38 to output audio data.

In this embodiment, a case is described in which the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the audio DSP is responsible for sound management, but in other embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. In this case, there is no need to provide a separate audio DSP.

<Configuration example of lamp control board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123. A special figure reservation display 127 is connected. The lamp ROM 122 stores programs executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, and the like. Here, the light emission pattern data is data indicating the respective light emission patterns of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LED built in the movable decorative member 14, and the like. The motion pattern data is data indicating a motion pattern of the movable decorative member 14 and the like.

Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122, the lamp CPU 121 displays the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the production display 125, the production first special figure reservation display 126, and the production second special figure reservation. Performs arithmetic processing when controlling the operation of the display 127 and the like.

The lamp CPU 121 reads out, from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122, light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 into the lamp RAM 123, and controls the light emission of the LEDs built into the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, and the movable decorative member 14. The lamp CPU 121 also reads out, from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122, operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 into the lamp RAM 123, and controls the drive of the motor that operates the movable decorative member 14.

The lamp CPU 121 also controls the display of changing and stopping patterns on the performance display 125 based on commands from the sub-control board 90. The lamp CPU 121 also controls the display of the reserved number related to the first special pattern determination by the performance first special pattern reserve display 126 and the display of the reserved number related to the second special pattern determination by the performance second special pattern reserve display 127 based on commands from the sub-control board 90.

[About gaming status]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be explained. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is controlled in one of three gaming states: "normal gaming state", "variable probability gaming state", and "time-saving gaming state".

In the "normal game state", special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively low, and a support function (so-called This is a gaming state in which a function called "Electric Support" etc.) is not provided. In the normal game state, the probability of executing a jackpot game based on special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/210) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively long time (for example, 20 seconds). , and when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds x 1 time).

The "variable probability game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state where the probability of executing a jackpot game is relatively high, and the support function described above is provided. That is, in the variable probability game state, the probability of determining that a jackpot game will be executed by special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/60) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 22 is determined to be opened by normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

The "time saving game state" is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in the above-mentioned low probability state and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the time-saving game state, the probability that it is determined that a jackpot game will be executed by special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/210). In addition, the probability that the second starting port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds x 3 times).

When comparing these game states with respect to the time that the special symbols change, the time that the special symbols change in the "high probability game state" and "time-saving game state" tends to be set to a relatively shorter time than the time that the special symbols change in the "normal game state". Note that the probability that a special game will be executed (jackpot probability), the probability that the second start hole 22 will be opened (winning probability of the normal symbol determination), the time that the normal symbols change, and the time that the second start hole 22 is opened, all of which are shown in the explanation of each game state, are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other probabilities and times may also be used.

In the following description, the state in which the support function is provided and it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 22 is referred to as a "high base state," and the state in which the support function is not provided and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 22 is referred to as a "low base state." In this embodiment, the "normal game state" corresponds to the low base state, and the "high probability game state" and "time-saving game state" correspond to the high base state.

[Game flow]
A game ball hit to the right by a player may not win a prize in the first starting hole 21 but can win a prize in the second starting hole 22. However, in the low base state, the second starting port 22 is difficult to open, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a low base state (which corresponds to the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment), the player plays the game by hitting the left hand aiming at the first starting opening 21. Become.

When a game ball hit to the left enters the first starting slot 21 during the normal gaming state, the main CPU 81 executes the first special symbol determination, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41. After that, the jackpot symbol or the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

If a losing symbol is displayed as a stopped symbol, the jackpot game will not be played and the game state will not change. On the other hand, if a jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol, a jackpot game will be played in which a predetermined number of rounds corresponding to that jackpot symbol are played, and after the jackpot game ends, the game will be controlled in a "high probability game state" or a "time-saving game state."

In addition, when the gaming state shifts to the "probability variable gaming state" or "time-saving gaming state" triggered by the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the gaming state shifts from the low base state to the high base state, the game ball to the second starting port 22 Due to the above-mentioned support function that makes it easier to win a prize, it is easier to win a game ball in the second starting hole 22 than in the first starting hole 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in a high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the ball to the right, aiming at the second starting opening 22. In addition, when both the right of first special symbol determination and the right of second special symbol determination are reserved, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the variable probability game state or the time saving game state, the second special symbol determination is basically performed.

As will be described in detail later, the jackpot patterns displayed on the second special pattern display 42 in the high probability game state or the time-limited game state include high probability game patterns and normal jackpot patterns, and after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled in the high probability game state or the time-limited game state. Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured as a so-called ST machine. Therefore, if a jackpot cannot be won in the high probability game state or the time-limited game state, the game state will be returned from the high probability game state (or the time-limited game state) to the normal game state.

[Regarding special design determination using random numbers]
Next, the determination process using the jackpot random number and the pattern random number will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Here, Fig. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the pattern random number. In the explanatory diagrams for each random number illustrated in Fig. 6 and subsequent figures, the possible range of the random number is set to a smaller range than the actual range in order to facilitate the explanation. In the gaming machine 1, when the gaming ball passes through the first start hole 21 (or the second start hole 22), the main CPU 81 acquires acquired information such as the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number.

<Processing based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random numbers illustrated in FIG. 6(A) are random numbers used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in FIG. 33) to determine whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability that it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed is A low probability state with a relatively low probability and a high probability state with a relatively high probability of executing a jackpot game are individually set.

In this embodiment, for the low probability state, as illustrated in the upper part of FIG. 6(A), four winning values from "0" to "3" and 836 losing values from "4" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82. When the game is controlled in the low probability state (which corresponds to the "normal game state" and the "time-saving game state" in this embodiment), the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed if the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball passing through the first start hole 21 (or the second start hole 22) matches any one of these four winning values. On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the low probability state, if the jackpot random number obtained matches any one of the 836 losing values, it determines that a jackpot game will not be executed.

Furthermore, for the high probability state (which corresponds to the "high probability game state" in this embodiment), as illustrated in the lower part of FIG. 6(A), 14 winning values from "0" to "13" and 826 losing values from "14" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82. When the game is controlled in the high probability state, the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed if the jackpot random number acquired in response to the game ball passing through the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22) matches any of the 14 winning values. On the other hand, when the game is controlled in the high probability state, if the jackpot random number acquired matches any of the 826 losing values, it determines that a jackpot game will not be executed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot random number can take on 840 values from "0" to "839" in both the low probability state and the high probability state (see FIG. 6(A)). Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/210 (=4/840), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (=14/840).

<Processing based on pattern random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines to execute a jackpot game, the main CPU 81 determines which random number among the random numbers set in advance for each type of jackpot matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the judgment. Determine the type of jackpot based on. In the gaming machine 1, different jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42) depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, the type of jackpot is determined by selecting the first special symbol (or second special symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42) as the jackpot symbol. That will happen.

(Types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(B), in this embodiment, the types of jackpots (jackpot symbols) that can be won in response to the game ball hitting the first starting port 21 during the normal gaming state are as follows: Two types are available: "5R fixed variation" and "5R normal".

The "5R Chance Variation" (see FIG. 6(B)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot pattern X1 being stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display 41, a jackpot game is executed that is made up of a total of five long-open round games, including one long-open round game (first round round game) in which the second large prize winning hole 28 is long-opened, and four long-open round games (second to fifth round round games) in which the first large prize winning hole 26 is long-opened.

If this "5R chance bonus" is won, both the second big prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are opened long during the first round of play. Therefore, the player can pass the game ball through the V prize opening 287 by simply hitting the ball to the right, and if even one game ball is detected by the V prize opening sensor 283 during the first round of play, the game will be controlled in the "chance bonus game state" after the big prize game ends.

In this embodiment, the number of times (ST count in FIG. 6(B)) that the second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination) and the variable display of the second special symbol (or first special symbol) are executed in the "high probability game state" after the end of the jackpot game related to the "5R high probability game" is set to 100 times, and if no jackpot is determined during the game, the high probability game state continues until 100 special symbol determinations are executed. Then, if all 100 special symbol determinations are misses, the game is controlled in the "normal game state" thereafter.

On the other hand, "5R normal" (see FIG. 6(B)) is a one-time operation in which the second big prize opening 28 is briefly opened in response to the jackpot symbol X2 being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41. A total of 5 times, including a short open round game (1st round round game) and 4 long open round games (2nd to 5th round round games) in which the first big prize opening 26 is opened long. This is a jackpot in which a jackpot game consisting of round games is executed. If this "5R normal" is won, the prize ball will not be paid out because basically no game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28 in the first round game. Therefore, in the case of winning "5R normal", the number of long open round games executed during the jackpot game is 4, and it can be said that it is actually a jackpot of 4 rounds.

When this "5R normal" is won, as described above, a short-open round game in which the second large winning hole 28 is opened for a short time is executed as the first round of round play. Therefore, the game ball does not enter the V during the jackpot game related to the 5R normal, and after the jackpot game related to the "5R normal" ends, the game is controlled in the "time-saving game state". In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the number of time-saving times for the "5R normal" is set to 100 times, and when a jackpot game is executed in response to the jackpot pattern X2 (which notifies the player that the "5R normal" has been won) being displayed on the first special pattern display 41, if a jackpot is not determined during the game, the game is controlled in the time-saving game state until 100 second special pattern determinations (or first special pattern determinations) are performed after the jackpot game ends.

By the way, even though you have acquired the right to control the game in the "probable variation gaming state" after the jackpot game ends by winning "5R fixed variation", for example, due to a ball jam in the game area 3, etc., one round It is conceivable that a situation may occur in which the game ball is not detected by the V winning a prize hole sensor 283 during the eye round game. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if such a situation occurs, in order to create a situation in which the player can easily aim for a jackpot after the end of the jackpot game, the game machine 1 according to the "5R probability change" If the game ball does not win a V prize during the first round of play, the second special symbol judgment (or first special symbol judgment) will be made 100 times in the same way as after the end of the jackpot game related to "5R normal". The game is controlled in a time-saving gaming state until the game is executed.

In this embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a jackpot, a random number value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6(B), 50 random number values are stored for the "5R special jackpot", and 50 random number values are stored for the "5R normal jackpot".

In this embodiment, the possible range of the symbol random number is set to 100 numbers from "0" to "99", and when a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to a game ball entering the first starting hole 21, "5R sure win" is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination at a rate of 50% (= 50/100 x 100), and "5R normal" is also selected at a rate of 50% (= 50/100 x 100) (see Figure 6 (B)).

Therefore, when the result of the first special pattern determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot pattern X1 indicating "5R sure win" is displayed stopped on the first special pattern display 41, and the probability that the jackpot pattern X2 indicating "5R normal" is displayed stopped on the first special pattern display 41 are both 50%.

In this way, if the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "3R High Chance A" or "3R Normal", in either case, the high base state will be reached after the big win game ends, so the player will play by hitting from the right, aiming at the gate 25 and the second starting hole 22.

(Type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6(C), there are three types of jackpots related to the second special pattern determination that is executed in response to the game ball entering the second starting hole 22: “10R sure jackpot,” “3R sure jackpot,” and “3R normal jackpot.”

Here, the "10R probability change" (see FIG. 6(C)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot pattern Y1 being stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 42, a jackpot game is executed that is made up of a total of 10 long-open round games, including one long-open round game (first round round game) that long-opens the second large prize opening 28 (and the V prize opening 287) and nine long-open round games (second to tenth round round games) that long-open the first large prize opening 26.

The "3R probability change" (see FIG. 6(C)) is a jackpot in which, in response to the jackpot pattern Y2 being stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display 42, a jackpot game is executed that is made up of a total of three long-open round games, including one long-open round game (first round round game) that long-opens the second large prize opening 28 (and the V prize opening 287) and two long-open round games (second and third round round games) that long-open the first large prize opening 26.

In this way, when winning the "10R probability variation" or "3R probability variation", both the second grand prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are opened long during the first round of the game. Therefore, as long as the player hits right during the first round game related to these jackpot games, the player can easily acquire the right to play the game in the "probability variable gaming state" after the jackpot game ends. be able to.

“3R Normal” (see FIG. 6(C)) shortens the second big winning hole 28 (and V winning hole 287) in response to the jackpot symbol Y3 being stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42. One short open round game to open (first round round game), and two long open round games to open the first big prize opening 26 long (second to third round round game), This is a jackpot game in which a jackpot game consisting of a total of three long open round games is executed. If this "3R normal" is won, the prize ball will not be paid out because basically no game ball enters the second grand prize opening 28 in the first round game. Therefore, when winning the "3R normal", the number of long open round games executed during the jackpot game is two, and it can be said that it is actually a two-round jackpot.

In addition, if the "3R normal" is won, a short opening round game in which the second big prize opening 28 is opened for a short period of time is executed as the first round game as described above. Therefore, the game ball will not win a V prize during the jackpot game related to 3R normal, and after the jackpot game related to ``3R normal'' ends, the game will be controlled in the ``time-saving gaming state.'' This is the same as in the case of winning the above "5R normal".

In this embodiment, when the result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random number value for determining the type of jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6(C), 80 random number values are stored for "10R special", 10 random number values are stored for "3R special", and 10 random number values are stored for "3R normal".

In this embodiment, as mentioned above, the possible range of the pattern random number is set to 100 from "0" to "99", and the number is acquired in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 21. When a jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number, "10R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 80% (=80/100 x 100) as the type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, and "3R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 80% (=80/100 x 100). They are selected at a rate of 10% (=10/100×100), and “3R normal” is selected at a rate of 10% (=10/100×100) (see FIG. 6(C)).

Therefore, when the result of the second special pattern determination is a jackpot, the probability that the jackpot pattern Y1 indicating "10R sure win" will be displayed as a stopped jackpot on the second special pattern display 42 is 80%, the probability that the jackpot pattern Y2 indicating "3R sure win" will be displayed as a stopped jackpot on the second special pattern display 42 is 10%, and the probability that the jackpot pattern Y3 indicating "3R normal" will be displayed as a stopped jackpot on the second special pattern display 42 is 10%.

<Processing based on reach random numbers>
When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball passing through the first starting hole 21 (or the second starting hole 22) matches the losing value (see Figure 6 (A)), i.e., when it determines that a jackpot game will not be executed, it determines whether to execute a reach-enabled presentation or a no-reach-enabled presentation based on whether the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the determination matches a random number value corresponding to a reach-enabled presentation or a no-reach-enabled presentation.

Although not shown in the figure, in this embodiment, 10 random number values are stored in the main ROM 82 for the reach effect, and the main CPU 81 decides to perform the reach effect when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 10 random number values. In addition, 90 random number values are stored for the non-reach effect, and the main CPU 81 decides to perform the non-reach effect when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 90 random number values. In this embodiment, the possible range of the reach random number is set to "0" to "99", and when it is determined that a jackpot game will not be played, the probability that the reach effect will be performed is 10% (= 10/100 x 100), and the probability that the reach effect will not be performed (the probability that the non-reach effect will be performed) is 90% (= 90/100 x 100).

When the main CPU 81 determines to perform the ready-to-reach presentation, the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern in which a variation presentation pattern of presentation symbols accompanied by a ready-to-reach presentation is selected by the sub control board 90 as a special symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, when it is decided to perform a no-reach performance, a variation pattern in which a variation performance pattern of performance symbols without a reach performance is selected by the sub-control board 90 is selected as a special symbol variation pattern.

[About the game flow]
Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 7. Here, FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Due to the board configuration of the game board 2, the game ball shot into the left game area 3L can win the first start hole 21, while the game ball shot into the right game area 3R cannot win the first start hole 21. In addition, in the normal game state, the second start hole 22 is unlikely to be in an open state, and even if it is in an open state, the opening time of the second start hole 22 is extremely short, and the possibility of the game ball winning the second start hole 22 is extremely low. Therefore, there is no advantage for the player to hit the right in the normal game state. As is clear from these, the normal game state is a left-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot by shooting a game ball into the left game area 3L than by shooting it into the right game area 3R (special pattern judgment is easier to execute). Therefore, the player hits the left in the normal game state.

When a game ball hit to the left during the normal gaming state enters the first starting hole 21, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41, , the first special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol, and the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is A jackpot game corresponding to is executed. These jackpot games are as described above based on FIG. 6(B).

When the result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is a "jackpot," there are times when a jackpot symbol indicating a guaranteed jackpot (jackpot symbol X1: see FIG. 6(B)) is displayed as a stopped symbol (see FIG. 7(A)), and times when a jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (jackpot symbol X2: see FIG. 6(B)) is displayed as a stopped symbol (see FIG. 7(D)).

Here, when the jackpot symbol X1, which indicates a guaranteed jackpot, is displayed, the jackpot game described above is executed based on FIG. 6(B). When this jackpot game is executed, the game is controlled in a guaranteed jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends, on the condition that the game ball enters the V during the long-open round game (during the first round of round play) in which the second large prize opening 28 and the V prize opening 287 are long-opened (see FIG. 7(B)). As described above, this guaranteed jackpot game state continues until 100 special symbol judgments (and the variable display of the special symbol) are performed, unless a jackpot is judged during the game. On the other hand, even if a jackpot game including the above-mentioned long open round game is played, if the game ball does not enter the V due to, for example, ball clogging in the game area 3, the game is controlled in a time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends, which can continue until the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed 100 times (see FIG. 7(C)).

Here, in the high probability game state, the probability of winning the normal symbol judgment, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the gate 25, is set to a relatively high probability (11/11 in this embodiment), and the opening time of the second starting hole 22 in the event of winning the normal symbol judgment is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds x 3 times in this embodiment). Therefore, the high probability game state is a right-side advantageous state in which it is easier to hit a jackpot (it is easier to execute a special symbol judgment) by shooting the game ball into the right game area 3R than by shooting it into the left game area 3L. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the high probability game state, the player hits to the right. This is also true when the game is controlled in the time-saving game state, which is a high base state like the high probability game state.

When a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting hole 22 while the game is being controlled in a variable probability gaming state, a second special symbol determination is executed, and a second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 42. After being variably displayed, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment is "Jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y2 (see Fig. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed, resulting in a probability-variable jackpot (Fig. 7(F)). (see FIG. 7(G)) and when the jackpot symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed, resulting in a normal jackpot (see FIG. 7(G)).

If the game ball enters the V during the jackpot game related to the special jackpot, the game will be controlled in the special jackpot game state again after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 7(B)), and if the game ball does not enter the V during the jackpot game, the game will be controlled in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 7(C)). On the other hand, since the game ball does not enter the V during the jackpot game related to the normal jackpot, the game will be controlled in the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 7(E)).

When a game ball hit to the right enters the second starting slot 22 while the game is controlled in the time-saving gaming state, a second special symbol determination is executed, and a second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 42. After being variably displayed, a second special symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "lost", the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) will be stopped and displayed, resulting in a probability-variable jackpot or a normal jackpot, and the probability-variable game will be played. In this state, the jackpot game is executed in the same way as when any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 is stopped and displayed. Here, if any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y2 related to the probability variable jackpot is displayed in a stopped state (see FIG. 7 (I)), on the condition that the game ball has won V during the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, The game is controlled in the variable probability game state (see FIG. 7 (J)), and if the game ball does not win a V prize during the jackpot game (see FIG. 7 (K)), the time saving game state is started again after the jackpot game ends. The game will be controlled.

On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol Y3 related to the normal jackpot is stopped and displayed in the time-saving game state (see FIG. 7 (M)), the game ball will not enter the V prize during the jackpot game, so after the jackpot game ends, the time-saving game state will return. The game is controlled (see FIG. 7(E)).

If no jackpot is determined to be a jackpot during the time-saving game state, which continues until 100 special symbol determinations (and special symbol changes are displayed), the game state will be returned from the time-saving game state to the normal game state (see Figure 7 (L)).

[About variable effects]
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special symbol (or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The variable performance performed on the display screen 70 in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol will be explained.

In the gaming machine 1, when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21 and a first special pattern determination is executed, the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the first special pattern display 41, and then the first special pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination is displayed as still. The display screen 70 is provided with a performance pattern display area 73 (see FIG. 2) in which a performance pattern notifying the result of the first special pattern determination (or the second special pattern determination) is displayed, and in conjunction with the variable display of the first special pattern, a variable performance including a variable display of the performance pattern is performed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 2). Then, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner for a variable time according to the variable pattern selected when the first special pattern determination is executed, the performance pattern is displayed as still in a manner indicating the result of the first special pattern determination as the first special pattern is displayed as still.

During such variable display of performance symbols, a so-called ready-to-reach performance may be performed. Specifically, in the effect pattern display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, part of a pattern row of effect patterns in which numbers 1 to 9 are written vertically consecutively from bottom to top is displayed horizontally. Three columns are displayed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, these symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner (scroll display) so as to scroll from top to bottom. On the other hand, when a reach effect is performed, before all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed, first, for example, the effect symbols in the left column (left symbol) and the effect symbols in the right column (right symbol). pseudo-stop in order or at the same time so as not to stop completely. FIG. 2 shows an example of a state in which three symbols are pseudo-stopped as left symbols, three symbols are pseudo-stopped as right symbols, and the middle symbol row continues to be scrolled. In addition, a pseudo-stop is a performance in which the performance symbols are swung on the spot without moving much, and in the following explanation, the actual stop (sometimes simply referred to as a "stop display") in which the performance symbols are completely still is used. ), it may be called a pseudo-stop.

When the same performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol come to a pseudo-stop on the effective line, a ready-to-win performance is established, and a reach-for-win performance is performed that makes the player expect that three identical performance symbols will line up. In this reach effect, the reach symbols (left and right symbols) are pseudo-stopped, and the performance symbols (middle symbols) that make up the middle row of symbols are scrolled at a low speed so that the player can identify them, and finally , This is an effect in which a medium symbol that is common to the reach symbol or a medium symbol that is different from the reach symbol is stopped on the active line to notify a win or loss.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, other display objects such as characters and items are used in addition to the presentation symbols for such ready-to-reach presentation. In addition, in the following explanation, in a variable performance in which a reach performance is performed, the performance performed until the reach is established may be referred to as a "pre-reach performance".

The types of reach effects will be described in detail later, but if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss," three effect symbols indicating a reach miss (e.g., "323") are pseudo-stopped to notify a miss, and these three effect symbols stop permanently as the miss symbol is displayed as a stopped first special symbol. On the other hand, if a reach effect is not performed, three effect symbols indicating a scatter symbol (e.g., "629") are pseudo-stopped to notify a miss, and these three effect symbols stop permanently as the miss symbol is displayed as a stopped first special symbol. In this way, if it is determined that a jackpot game will not be played, a miss notification effect is executed in which the three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped with a reach miss symbol or scatter symbol indicating a miss, and then stopped permanently to notify a miss (a jackpot game will not be played).

If this loss notification performance is executed, the jackpot game will not be executed, and if the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, the first special symbol and performance symbol will be displayed for a predetermined confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds). After being stopped and displayed, the suspended first special symbol determination is performed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to this determination is started.

On the other hand, if the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot," then a reach effect is usually executed while the first special symbol is being displayed and changing, and three effect symbols showing a repeating number (for example, "333") are pseudo-stopped to notify of a jackpot, and these three effect symbols are actually stopped as the jackpot symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. In this way, when it is determined that a jackpot game will be played, a hit notification effect is executed in which the three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped in a manner indicating a jackpot, and then actually stopped, to notify of a jackpot (that a jackpot game will be played). When this hit notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is played.

Up to this point, we have described a variable performance including a performance in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped as the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped.However, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Even when the display is stopped after being displayed, a similar fluctuating effect is performed.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
2 illustrates an example of the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in the normal game state. When the game is controlled in the normal game state, as illustrated in FIG. 2, a reserved icon display area 71, the icon display area 72, and a performance pattern display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70. As described above, the performance pattern display area 73 is a display area in which the left pattern constituting the left pattern row, the middle pattern constituting the middle pattern row, and the right pattern constituting the right pattern row are displayed.

<Pending icon display area 71>
The pending icon display area 71 is a display area where a pending icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is pending is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 21 in a situation where special symbol determination and special symbol fluctuation display cannot be started immediately, such as during a special symbol fluctuation display or during a jackpot game, the first special The right to judge symbols is reserved up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment).

In this way, when the right to the first special pattern determination is reserved, the reserved icon display area 71 displays the same number of reserved icons as the number of reserved first special pattern determinations indicated by the first special pattern reservation indicator 44. Figure 2 shows an example of a state in which two reserved icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 to indicate that the number of reserved first special pattern determinations is "2".

If a reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 when a highly reliable reach performance such as an SPSP reach described later is being performed, not only will the display area used for the reach performance be limited, but the display of the reserved icon may also reduce the interest of the reach performance. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display objects (in this embodiment, the bases of the reserved icons) and reserved icons constituting the reserved icon display area 71 are displayed during a normal reach or SP reach, while as the reach performance progresses from a normal reach or SP reach to an SPSP reach, the display objects and reserved icons constituting the reserved icon display area 71 are erased from the display screen 70, and after the SPSP reach ends, the display objects and reserved icons constituting the reserved icon display area 71 are displayed again.

Moreover, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, basically no game ball enters the second starting port 22. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, basically, the right to determine the second special symbol is not suspended, and a pending icon related to the second special symbol determination is displayed on the display screen 70, or this pending icon is displayed on the display screen 70. A display area for display is not formed.

<Icon Display Area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area that displays the icon as a variation suggesting image that suggests that the first special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and is erased from the icon display area 72, for example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. However, the timing of erasing the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be erased during the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, the icon may be erased during the development of the SPSP reach described later or in the middle of the SPSP reach.

By the way, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 in a state where the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner and the right to judge the special symbol is not reserved, the first special symbol will not be displayed in a variable manner. Accordingly, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. On the other hand, when the pending icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71 and the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is finished, the icon is displayed in the pending icon display area 71. A first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon (the pending icon displayed in the position closest to the icon display area 72) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in accordance with the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest pending icon shifts from the pending icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, It will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (see FIG. 2). Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 rather than the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

When a reserved icon other than the most recent reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71, the other reserved icons in the reserved icon display area 71 shift toward the icon display area 72 as the most recent reserved icon shifts to the icon display area 72. As is clear from the explanation so far, in the gaming machine 1, an icon corresponding to the reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72, so in the following explanation, when there is no need to distinguish between the reserved icon and the icon, they may be collectively referred to as simply "icon".

(About the icon change effects)
Incidentally, the reserved icon is usually displayed as a white reserved icon (default reserved icon). In contrast, when a reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71, an icon change effect may be performed in which the color of the reserved icon changes. When this icon change effect is performed, the white reserved icon changes to a reserved icon of a color that suggests the reliability of a jackpot, such as blue, green, or red. The colors that suggest the reliability of a jackpot, as exemplified here, are arranged in order from low to high reliability of a jackpot. Red is likely to be selected when the judgment result of the first special pattern judgment corresponding to the red reserved icon is a "jackpot" or when the variation time of the special pattern is set to a relatively long time even if the result is a "miss". Green is likely to be selected when the variation time of the special pattern is set to a medium time even if the result is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Blue is likely to be selected when the result is a "miss" or when the result is a "miss" and the variation time of the special pattern is set to a relatively short time. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of a white reserved icon is set to approximately 1%, the jackpot reliability of a blue reserved icon is set to approximately 3%, the jackpot reliability of a green reserved icon is set to approximately 15%, and the jackpot reliability of a red reserved icon is set to approximately 45%.

Note that, while the example described here is an icon change effect in which the display color of a reserved icon changes only once when it is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71, other icon change effects may also be performed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment. That is, for example, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of a single reserved icon changes multiple times, such as when a white reserved icon is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71, it changes to a blue reserved icon and then to a green reserved icon. Also, when a white reserved icon that has shifted from the reserved icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the white reserved icon changes.

Further, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes, and then when the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the display color changes. In some cases, an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the icon changes in both the pending icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72. In addition, an icon change effect may be performed in which the pending icon is initially displayed in a display color other than white (for example, blue), or an icon change effect may be performed in which the display color of the pending icon whose initial color is other than white is changed. .

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment displays reserved information on the display screen 70 indicating that the right to determine a special symbol is reserved, and is capable of changing the display mode of the reserved information. Note that in the following description, reserved icons and icons whose display color is a color other than white may be referred to as "special icons" to distinguish them from normal reserved icons and icons whose display color is white.

[Flow of the presentation accompanying the variable display of the first special symbol]
8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of various effects such as reach effects in a normal game state. When a first special symbol determination is executed in a normal game state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then the first special symbol is displayed stationary in a manner showing the result of the first special symbol determination. In response to this, on the display screen 70, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the variable display of the effect symbols (scrolling display of three symbol rows) starts in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 8(A)).

Here, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lose", for example, different performance symbols as left symbols and right symbols will pseudo-stop on the effective line, and in this non-reach mode, the symbol row in the middle row A no-reach effect (see FIG. 8(B)) may be performed in which the only scrolling information is displayed. When this no-reach effect (variable effect that does not include a reach effect) is performed, the three effect symbols that show the winning result are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the losing symbol is displayed as the first special symbol. Along with the stop display, a loss notification performance (see FIG. 8(C)) will be performed to stop these three performance symbols.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "jackpot" or if it is decided to perform a reach effect (variable effect including a reach effect) even though it is a "loss", the first special symbol During the variable display, for example, a pre-reach effect in which a predetermined left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line of the effect symbol display area 73, and then the right symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the left symbol, is moved onto the effective line. (See FIG. 8(D)). Then, when the same left symbol and right symbol come to a pseudo stop on the active line, a reach is established (see FIG. 8(E)). When a reach is established in this way, the player expects that the middle symbol, which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol (left symbol and right symbol), will stop on the active line and the symbols will be aligned. A performance will be held.

In this embodiment, four types of reach effects are available as reach effects that can be executed in conjunction with the changing display of the first special pattern: normal reach, character reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach (see Figure 8).

The normal reach (see FIG. 8(F)) is the reach effect with the lowest jackpot reliability (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 2%) among the four types of reach effects described above. When a reach is established, a normal reach is first performed (see Figures 8 (E) and (F)), and during the normal reach, the middle row that was scrolling at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) The scrolling speed of the symbol row gradually decreases.

Here, if the result of the first special symbol determination is "miss," and for example, a change pattern with a change time of 30 seconds is selected at the start of the display of the first special symbol change, a middle symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line to display a performance symbol of a reach miss (for example, "434"), and a miss notification performance (see FIG. 8 (G)) is performed in which these performance symbols are actually stopped.

On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "Jackpot" and, for example, a variation pattern with a variation time of 30 seconds is selected at the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, then if the variation pattern is the same as the reach symbol, By pseudo-stopping the symbols on the activated line, a zero-number (for example, "444") performance symbol is displayed, and a hit notification performance (see FIG. 8(H)) is performed in which these performance symbols are actually stopped.

In addition, if a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected, there will be no hit notification performance or loss notification performance in normal reach, and other reach performances with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach will be performed. develops into A reach that develops from a normal reach is a character reach, a SP reach, or a SPSP reach.

Among the four types of reach effects, the character reach (see Figure 8 (I)) has the second lowest reliability of a jackpot after the normal reach (for example, reliability of a jackpot: about 4%). When this character reach develops, a specified action is taken in which the animated character tries to stop the middle symbol that is the same as the reach symbol, and the result is announced depending on whether or not the action is successful.

In addition, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 8(I), there is a character A reach where character A performs the above action, a character B reach where character B performs the above action, and a character C reach where character C performs the above action. There are three types of character reaches, including character C reach, which performs actions, and no matter which character reach develops, the jackpot reliability is about 4%. However, the jackpot reliability of these character reaches does not necessarily have to be the same; for example, the jackpot reliability increases in the order of character A reach, character B reach, and character C reach. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot reliability varies depending on the type of the jackpot.

When it develops into a Chara Reach, the probability of it winning is relatively low at about 4%, so in most cases, the Chara Reach does not develop into another reach effect, and a miss notification effect is performed in the Chara Reach (see Figures 8 (I) and (C)). On the other hand, if the result of this first special pattern determination is a "jackpot," a win notification effect may be performed in the Chara Reach (see Figures 8 (I) and (H)). Also, if the result of this first special pattern determination is a "jackpot" or "miss," and a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special pattern, the reach effect will develop from the Chara Reach to an SP Reach (see Figure 8 (J)) or an SPSP Reach (see Figure 6 (K)).

SP reach (see Figure 8 (J)) is a reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than character reach (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 15%), and wins and losses depend on the outcome of the battle between the main character and the enemy character. be notified. Regarding this SP reach, there are cases in which normal reach develops into SP reach via character reach (see Figure 8 (F), (I), and (J)), and cases where SP reach develops from normal reach through character reach. There are cases where this directly develops (Fig. 8 (F) and (I)).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8(J), three types of SP reaches are provided: a first SP reach, a second SP reach, and a third SP reach. Here, the first SP reach is an SP reach in which the main character battles enemy character A, the second SP reach is an SP reach in which the main character battles enemy character B, and the third SP reach is an SP reach in which the main character battles enemy character C. In this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is approximately 15% regardless of which of these three types of SP reaches develops, but it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the type of enemy character that the main character battles, for example, the reliability of a jackpot increases in the order of the first SP reach, the second SP reach, and the third SP reach.

In this embodiment, when the SP reach develops into any of these reach effects, the SP reach does not develop into other reach effects, and the win or loss is announced at the final stage of the SP reach. Specifically, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "Jackpot", a victory representing the protagonist character winning the battle with the enemy character at the end of SP reach. A performance is performed, and then a winning notification performance (see FIG. 8(H)) is performed. On the other hand, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of this symbol change is "Loss", a defeat effect showing the main character losing the battle with the enemy character at the end of SP reach will be displayed. After that, a loss notification effect (see FIG. 8(C)) is performed.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "jackpot", a fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol. On the contrary, it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time. In addition, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is "lost", it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time as the variation pattern of the first special symbol; Therefore, a short variation pattern is likely to be selected.

As described above, since the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristics regarding the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the game machine 1 has the characteristics described above regarding the selection of the variation pattern of the first special symbol. However, it can be said that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the normal reach develops directly to the SP reach without going through the character reach.

On the other hand, SPSP reach (see Figure 8 (K)) is a reach effect with the highest jackpot reliability among the above four types of reach effects (for example, jackpot reliability: approximately 35%), and it is a reach effect that has the highest jackpot reliability (for example, jackpot reliability: about 35%). Win or lose will be announced based on the outcome of the battle.

In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 8(K), three types of SPSP reaches are prepared: a first SPSP reach, a second SPSP reach, and a third SPSP reach. Here, the first SPSP reach is an SPSP reach in which the main character battles enemy character D, the second SPSP reach is an SPSP reach in which the main character battles enemy character E, and the third SPSP reach is an SPSP reach in which the main character battles enemy character E. This is SPSP Reach who battles with Character F. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is approximately 35% regardless of which of these three types of SPSP reach develops, but for example, the jackpot reliability increases in the order of 1st SPSP reach, 2nd SPSP reach, and 3rd SPSP reach. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the type of enemy character that battles with the main character.

In this embodiment, if one of these SPSP reaches develops, the SPSP reach does not develop into another reach effect, and a win or loss is announced at the end of the SPSP reach. Specifically, if the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the current pattern change is a "jackpot," a victory effect is held at the end of the SPSP reach, showing the main character winning a battle with an enemy character, followed by a win announcement effect (see FIG. 8 (H)). On the other hand, if the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the current pattern change is a "loss," a defeat effect is held at the end of the SP reach, showing the main character losing a battle with an enemy character, followed by a loss announcement effect (see FIG. 8 (C)).

There are two ways to reach this SPSP reach: one that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach via character reach (see Figure 8 (F), (I), and (K)), and one that develops from normal reach to SPSP reach without passing through character reach. There are two cases: (see FIGS. 8(F) and (K)), and the latter case has a higher jackpot reliability than the former case.

Note that the types of ready-to-win effects and the way in which the ready-to-reach effects are developed are merely examples, and the types of ready-to-reach effects and the way in which they are developed may be other types. That is, for example, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which there are three types of reach effects for character reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach, but for example, there are five types, 1st SP reach to 5th SP reach. The types of each reach effect may be other than three types, such as the following ready-to-reach effects. Further, in this embodiment, a case will be described in which the SP reach does not develop into the SPSP reach, but in other embodiments, a configuration in which the SP reach can develop into the SPSP reach may be adopted.

[About advance judgment processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game before the first special symbol determination is performed for that right. Pre-determination processing may be performed. Specifically, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number in response to the game ball winning in the first starting hole 21, and based on the acquired jackpot random number, the Prior to the jackpot determination process in the first special symbol determination (see step S308 in FIG. 33), a similar jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not it will be determined as a "jackpot" when the first special symbol determination is executed. Determine in advance whether In addition, a process similar to the fluctuation pattern selection process (see step S309 in FIG. 33) is performed based on the fluctuation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, and which fluctuation pattern is selected when the first special symbol determination is executed. Determine in advance what will happen.

In this way, when the main CPU 81 performs a pre-determination process in response to the right to determine the first special symbol being reserved, it transmits a reservation command including pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination to the sub-control board 90. In response, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the icon change performance described above based on the pre-determination information included in the reservation command. Then, if it is determined that an icon change performance is to be executed, it determines the change pattern in which the display mode of the icon (reserved icon or the icon in question) (in this embodiment, the color of the icon) will be changed, and causes the image and sound control board 100 to execute an icon change performance based on the result of the determination.

The preliminary determination process executed by the main CPU 81 to realize the prefetch effect such as the icon change effect will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 31 and 32.

[Specific example of performance in normal gaming state]
Next, a specific example of the performance in the normal game state will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 and 10 are screen diagrams illustrating effects in the normal gaming state. Here, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, a winning notification effect is performed in the SPSP reach, which is directly developed from the normal reach. The effect executed when the variation pattern is selected will be explained.

9(A) shows an example of a state in which a single reserved icon (e.g., a green reserved icon) is displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 on the display screen 70, and a performance pattern showing the "526" scatter pattern is displayed in a stopped state in order to inform the user that the result of the first special pattern determination corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is "miss". In this way, when a predetermined determination time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed since the missing pattern is displayed as the first special pattern, the first special pattern determination corresponding to the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 71 (here, the green reserved icon) is executed. Then, when the result of the first special pattern determination is "big win" and a change pattern in which a change performance pattern that directly develops from a normal reach to an SPSP reach is selected as the change pattern of the first special pattern is selected, the following effect is performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest pending icon, the earliest displayed in the pending icon display area 71 The pending icon is shifted to the icon display area 72, and scrolling display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 9A and 9B). When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the scroll display of these three symbol rows was started, for example, a speech preview effect image showing a predetermined character speaking a speech is displayed on the display screen 70, and the speech is transmitted from the speaker 38. The dialogue preview to be output is executed. In this dialogue preview, the reliability of the jackpot is suggested based on the type of character speaking the dialogue, the content of the dialogue, the font color of the dialogue, etc.

Following the above-mentioned dialogue announcement, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed. Here, the pseudo consecutive performance is a performance that makes it appear as if the performance pattern displayed in the performance pattern display area 73 is displayed multiple times during the display of one special pattern (here, the first special pattern). For this pseudo consecutive performance, the following performance display is performed.

In other words, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the symbol column in the right column decreases (the left symbol that pseudo-stopped first and (Different) The right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols decreases, and the 7 symbols pseudo-stop as the middle symbol (pseudo-continuous pattern) to notify the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect. Stop (see FIG. 9(D)).

In this way, after the different performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol have pseudo-stopped, when the 7 symbols in the middle row have pseudo-stopped, the pseudo-second fluctuating performance that follows the pseudo-first fluctuating fluctuating performance is started. . Specifically, after the characters “×2” indicating the start of the second pseudo-variable effect are displayed in a large size in the center area of the display screen 70, the characters “×2” are displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 70. Along with this, the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 9(D) and (E)). When the second pseudo series of variable effects is being performed, for example, a dialogue preview may be executed in the same way as during the first pseudo series of variable effects (see FIG. 9(F)).

As described above, when a dialogue preview is executed during the pseudo second consecutive change performance, the second pseudo consecutive performance is executed during the current display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9(G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 9(G), the scroll speed of the left symbol row slows down and the left symbol (e.g., symbol 2) pseudo stops, then the scroll speed of the right symbol row slows down and the right symbol (e.g., symbol 5) pseudo stops, and then the scroll speed of the middle symbol row slows down and the middle symbol, symbol 7, pseudo stops.

When the second pseudo consecutive performance is executed during the display of the first special symbol, the pseudo third consecutive performance starts following the pseudo second consecutive performance. Specifically, after the character "x3" indicating the start of the pseudo third consecutive performance is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character "x3" is displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows is resumed in the performance symbol display area 73 (see Figures 9 (G) and (H)).

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the pseudo third fluctuating effect in this way, the scrolling speed of the symbol row in the left column decreases, the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) pseudo-stops, and then , the scrolling speed of the right symbol column decreases (same as the left symbol), and the right symbols (here, 3 symbols) come to a pseudo stop, establishing a reach (see FIG. 9(I)).

Here, we have explained the case where the "pre-reach pseudo series" that restarts the scrolling display of each symbol row before the reach is established, but the "post-reach pseudo series" that restarts the scroll display of each symbol row after the reach is established. In some cases, a "continuation" is executed. Furthermore, both the pre-reach pseudo-run and the post-reach pseudo-run may be executed.

As described above, when the same performance symbols as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped and reach is established, first, normal reach (see FIG. 8(E)) is executed (see FIG. 10(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10(A), after the reach is established, the scrolling speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases, and the reach symbols (here, 3 symbols on the left and 3 symbols on the right) and The same middle symbol (in this case, the middle 3 symbol) is placed on the active line defined by the reach symbol (a straight line extending in the left-right direction connecting the vertical center of the left 3 symbols and the vertical center of the right 3 symbols). An effect display is performed to show how the object is approaching.

Here, in order to progress from a normal reach to an SPSP reach, the following performance display is performed. That is, when the scroll display of the middle row of symbols is being performed, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol (here, 3 symbols) passes over the active line, and the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols increases, making it difficult to distinguish the middle symbol, and a development performance is performed suggesting that the progress will be to an SPSP reach (see FIG. 10(B)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10(B), in the process of moving the left 3 symbols to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while being reduced, they rotate clockwise once with the scroll direction as the axis and then move to the upper left area, and at the same time, in the process of moving the right 3 symbols to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while being reduced, they rotate clockwise once with the scroll direction as the axis and then move to the upper right area. After that, until the end of the display of the first special symbol, the three symbols on the left will be displayed as pseudo-stops in the upper left area, and the three symbols on the right will be displayed as pseudo-stops in the upper right area (see Figures 10 (C) to (H)).

Next, when the development effect (see FIG. 10(B)) that suggests the development to an SPSP reach is performed as described above, a blackout effect is performed (see FIG. 10(C)). Specifically, for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the development effect is performed, as exemplified in FIG. 10(C), the various display objects (e.g., characters) that were displayed on the display screen 70 are hidden, and only the reach symbols (here, 3 symbols on the left and 3 symbols on the right) and the icon are displayed superimposed on a solid black background image.

Following this blackout effect, for example, a group preview may be performed as a preview effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot (see FIG. 10(D)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10(D), an effect display is performed that shows a large number of characters moving from right to left on the display screen 70.

Note that this group announcement is not necessarily executed when the blackout effect is performed; there are cases where the group announcement is executed following the blackout effect before the SPSP reach begins, and cases where the SPSP reach begins without the group announcement following the blackout effect being executed, with the former having a higher reliability of a jackpot than the latter (the hit notification effect is more likely to be executed). The timing of the execution of this group announcement is not limited to immediately after the blackout effect, and there are also cases where the group announcement occurs immediately after the reach is established.

When the blackout effect and the group preview are executed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the blackout effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect image, which is the effect image related to SPSP reach, is displayed on the display screen 70 (FIG. 10). (See E). As a result, for example, an effect display showing a battle between the main character and the enemy character is performed. This is as described above based on FIG. 8(K). Thereafter, when the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a first performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the first performance button 35 (see FIG. 10(F)). Specifically, a first performance button image imitating the first performance button 35 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period during which operation of the first performance button 35 is valid are displayed.

In this first performance button operation promotion performance, it is possible to win a jackpot at the timing when the first performance button 35 is operated during its validity period, or at the timing when the validity period ends without the first performance button 35 being operated. For example, a cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed on the performance image (other than the ready-to-reach symbol) displayed on the display screen 70 (FIG. 10 (G) reference). This cut-in is an effect that suggests the degree of jackpot reliability, and there are two cases in which a green cut-in image is superimposed and a red cut-in image is superimposed, and a red cut-in image in which a red cut-in image is superimposed. There are cases where a cut-in is performed, and cases where a gold cut-in that displays a gold cut-in image superimposed is performed.If these cut-ins are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of jackpot, green cut-in, The order is red cut-in, then gold cut-in.

When the cut-in occurs in this way and the SPSP reach reaches its final stage, a second performance button operation promotion performance is performed to prompt the player to operate the second performance button 36 (see FIG. 10(H)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 10(H), during the valid period of the second performance button operation promotion performance, a second performance button image imitating the second performance button 36 and a message "Press!" are displayed. Characters indicating the operation content of the second effect button 36 and a validity period gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed.

If the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period of this second performance button operation promotion performance, the three performance symbols showing the double number will be pseudo-stopped as an operation corresponding performance according to the operation, and then the main stop will be stopped. A winning notification effect is performed (see FIG. 10(I)).

Note that, here, we have taken the example of a case where the result of the first special pattern determination performed when the variable display of the current first special pattern begins is a "jackpot," and therefore a win notification effect is performed as an operation-responsive effect. However, if the result of the current first special pattern determination is a "miss," then a miss notification effect is performed in which the three performance symbols indicating a reach miss are pseudo-stopped and then actually stopped as an operation-responsive effect.

[About the effects that take place during big win games]
Next, a description will be given of the effects that are executed during a jackpot game when a certain jackpot is won, with reference to Fig. 11. Here, Fig. 11 is a screen diagram showing an example of an effect when a V prize is announced during a jackpot game.

As mentioned above, when the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment in the normal gaming state is "jackpot", any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 (see FIG. 6(B)) is displayed as the first special symbol. It is stopped and displayed on the device 41. Along with this, three performance symbols indicating a double number, such as "222", for example, are stopped on the display screen 70. Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the double number of "777" and the double number of "333" definitively notify that the game will be controlled in a variable probability game state after the jackpot game ends. It is considered as a performance symbol, and when 5R probability variation is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination (when jackpot symbol As a symbol, one of these doubles will be permanently stopped on the display screen 70.

In this way, when the three performance symbols showing the repeated number "777" that definitely indicates a jackpot with a special probability of occurring come to a stop as the jackpot symbol X1 is stopped, an opening performance is performed during the opening period of the jackpot game, including a performance in which the word "RUSH BONUS" is displayed on the display screen 70 to indicate that a jackpot with a special probability of occurring is reached (see FIG. 11 (A)). After this opening period starts, the word "Right Hit" and a right-pointing arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70 to encourage the player to hit the right (see FIG. 11 (A) to (E)).

When the opening period in which the above-mentioned opening performance is performed ends, as described above, a long open round game in which the second big winning hole 28 and the V winning hole 287 are opened long is started as the first round round game, Along with this, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 11(B) and (C)) is executed to urge the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning hole 287. In FIGS. 11(B) and (C), the words "Aim for the V" and three arrows pointing to the V prize opening 287 (including the words "Right hit") are displayed as a launch promotion effect. An example is shown. Note that at the start of such a launch promotion performance, a voice saying "Aim for V" is output from the speaker 38.

When the game ball passes through the V winning hole 287 during the first round of play in which such a launch promotion effect is performed, the launch promotion effect ends and a V winning notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball has entered the V prize (see FIG. 11 (D)). FIG. 11 (D) shows an example of a V prize notification effect in which a performance display is performed showing two characters holding up a star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" in joy, and when the game ball enters the V prize, a predetermined V prize notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

In this way, when the V-winning notification effect is executed to notify the player that the game ball has won the V-winning during the first round of round play, a predetermined interval period is entered, and during the following second round of round play (long-open round play of the first large winning hole 26), the star-shaped emblem is displayed small in the lower left area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 11 (E)). Although not shown in FIG. 11, in round play from the third round onwards, a round-in-round effect similar to that during the second round of round play is performed. Then, when the ending period of the big win game following the final round (fifth round) of round play begins, the words "Entering the Fierce Fighting RUSH!" are displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, and the sound "Entering the Fierce Fighting RUSH!" is output from the speaker 38 to notify the player that a performance in a performance mode called "Fierce Fighting RUSH" that definitely notifies the player that the game is in a "probable bonus game state" is about to begin.

[About composite expectation performance]
Next, the composite expectation effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 12 and 13. Fig. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the composite expectation effect. Fig. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the characteristics of the character waiting effect and the special cut-in, and the reliability of the big win.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute both or either of the first expectation effect and the second expectation effect as an effect that creates the expectation that the above-mentioned winning notification effect will be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, and the execution of the above-mentioned composite expectation effect is synonymous with the execution of both the first expectation effect and the second expectation effect within the same variation. In other words, the composite expectation effect means that the first expectation effect and the second expectation effect are combined within the same variation.

(Character standby performance)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a character standby performance can be executed as the first expected performance (see FIGS. 12(C) to 12(G)). This character standby performance is a performance in which a character (hereinafter referred to as "character") appears on the display screen 70 and waits on the display screen 70 without being deleted from the display screen 70. Characters on standby perform various actions, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect. In this embodiment, a case will be described using as an example a case in which a character that appears by a character standby effect waits until the end of normal reach (see FIG. 12(H)).

As this character standby effect, a character A standby effect, a character B standby effect, and a character C standby effect are prepared. The character A standby effect (see FIG. 12(C)) is an effect in which character A appearing in the above-mentioned character A reach (see FIG. 8(I)) is displayed on the display screen 70 and made to stand by. Based on the character A standby effect, it is possible to easily recognize that character A reach is likely to be executed. Note that, as described above based on FIG. 8, although the reliability of the jackpot for the character A reach itself is not so high, it is possible to move from the character A reach to a highly reliable reach (in this embodiment, SP reach or SPSP reach). Reach production may develop. Therefore, by executing the character A standby effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

The character B waiting effect (see FIG. 12(E)) is an effect in which character B, who appears in the character B reach described above (see FIG. 8(I)), is displayed on the display screen 70 and kept waiting, and the player can easily recognize that there is a possibility that a character B reach will be executed based on the character B waiting effect. Note that, like the character A reach, the character B reach is not a reach effect with a particularly high reliability of a jackpot, but there are cases in which the reach effect develops from the character B reach to a high reliability reach (in this embodiment, an SP reach or SPSP reach). For this reason, by executing the character B waiting effect, it is possible to make the player expect that a win notification effect will be executed.

The character C standby effect (see FIG. 12(G)) is an effect in which the character C appearing in the above-mentioned character C reach (see FIG. 8(I)) is displayed on the display screen 70 and made to stand by. Based on the character C standby effect, it is possible to easily recognize that character C reach is likely to be executed. Note that, like Character A Reach and Character B Reach, Character C Reach is not a reach performance with a high reliability of jackpot, but it is a highly reliable reach from Character C Reach (in this embodiment, SP Reach or SPSP Reach). In some cases, the reach performance may develop. Therefore, by executing the character C standby effect, it is possible to make the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed.

(Special cut-in)
In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a special cut-in can be executed as the second expected effect (see FIG. 12(L)). In this embodiment, this special cut-in is a superimposed display of a cut-in image representing the main character appearing in SPSP Reach described above on the effect image (for example, a background image or a hold icon) currently being displayed on the display screen 70. At the same time, the main character's voice saying "It's extremely hot!" is output from the speaker 38. In this way, the cut-in image used for the special cut-in represents the main character that appears in SPSP Reach, which suggests that SPSP Reach is executed by executing the special cut-in. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect.

Note that the special cut-in is an effect with relatively high jackpot reliability, and in this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is set to about 55% (see FIG. 13(B)).

From here on, we will explain a series of effects related to the composite expectation effects consisting of a character standby effect and a special cut-in. Note that the character standby effect and special cut-in described below are realized by the sub-CPU 91 executing the special cut-in effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 47) and the character standby effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 48) illustrated in FIG. 46 based on the variation start command related to the first special pattern determination sent from the main control board 80, and instructing the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to execute effects based on the effect pattern information based on these setting processes.

First, as the variable display of the first special symbol starts in the normal game state, a variable display including the variable display of the display symbol starts on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12(A)). The start of this variable display is as described above with reference to FIG. 8(A). Once the variable display starts, the following displays may be performed until the normal reach (see FIG. 8(F)) ends.

First, a first operation promotion effect (first operation promotion effect) is performed to prompt the player to operate the first operation button 35 (see FIG. 12 (B)). Although not shown in the figure, this first operation promotion effect displays on the display screen 70 a first operation button image that resembles the first operation button 35 and a valid period gauge that indicates the remaining time of the valid period during which operation of the first operation button 35 is valid. If the player operates the first operation button 35 during the valid period related to this first operation promotion effect, a character A standby effect may be executed (see FIGS. 12 (B) and (C)).

Note that the character A standby effect is not necessarily executed if the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the first operation prompt effect, and the character A standby effect may not be executed even if the first effect button 35 is operated. In other words, if it is determined in advance at the start of the current pattern change that the character A standby effect will be executed, the character A standby effect will be executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the first operation prompt effect, and conversely, if it is determined in advance at the start of the current pattern change that the character A standby effect will not be executed, the character A standby effect will not be executed even if the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the first operation prompt effect.

In addition, if it has been previously determined at the start of the current pattern change that the character A standby effect will be executed, and the first effect button 35 is not operated during the effective period of the first operation prompt effect, the character A standby effect will be executed automatically at the end of this effective period.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the first operation prompting effect was performed, a second operation prompting effect (a second operation prompting effect) is performed to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 12 (D)). This second operation prompting effect is performed in the same manner as the first operation prompting effect. If the player operates the first effect button 35 during the valid period of this second operation prompting effect, a character B standby effect may be executed (see FIG. 12 (D) and (E)).

Note that the character B standby effect is not necessarily executed if the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation prompt effect, and the character B standby effect may not be executed even if the first effect button 35 is operated. In other words, if it is determined in advance at the start of the current pattern change that the character B standby effect will be executed, the character B standby effect will be executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the second operation prompt effect, and conversely, if it is determined in advance at the start of the current pattern change that the character B standby effect will not be executed, the character B standby effect will not be executed even if the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation prompt effect.

In addition, in the case where it has been decided in advance to execute the character B standby effect at the start of the current symbol variation, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the valid period related to the second operation promotion effect, The character B standby effect is automatically executed at the timing when this valid period ends.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the second operation promotion performance was performed, a third operation promotion performance (third operation promotion performance) that prompts the player to operate the first performance button 35 is performed (FIG. 12(F) reference). This third operation promotion performance is performed in the same manner as the first operation promotion performance and the second operation promotion performance. If the player operates the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the third operation promotion performance, the character C standby performance may be executed (see FIGS. 12(F) and (G)).

Note that the character C standby effect is not necessarily executed if the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the third operation prompt effect, and the character C standby effect may not be executed even if the first effect button 35 is operated. In other words, if it is determined in advance at the start of the current pattern change that the character C standby effect will be executed, the character C standby effect will be executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the third operation prompt effect, and conversely, if it is determined in advance at the start of the current pattern change that the character C standby effect will not be executed, the character C standby effect will not be executed even if the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the second operation prompt effect.

In addition, if it has been previously determined at the start of the current pattern change that the character C standby effect will be executed, and the first effect button 35 is not operated during the effective period of the third operation prompt effect, the character C standby effect will be executed automatically at the end of this effective period.

In this way, when a predetermined time has passed since the third operation prompting effect is performed as the third operation prompting effect, the normal reach ends (see FIG. 12 (H)). As is clear from the explanation so far, the character standby effect in this embodiment is performed using the period in which the pre-reach effect (see FIG. 8 (D)) is performed and the period in which the normal reach (see FIG. 8 (F)) is performed. Also, the character A standby effect, the character B standby effect, and the character C standby effect may or may not be performed. For this reason, within the same change, there are cases where no character standby effects are performed, cases where only one character standby effect is performed, cases where two character standby effects are performed, and cases where all three character standby effects are performed.

Examples of cases where only one character standby performance is executed within the same change include the following. That is, when the character A standby performance is executed and then the character B standby performance and the character C standby performance are not executed, when the character B standby performance is executed without the character A standby performance being executed and then the character C standby performance is not executed, and when the character C standby performance is executed without the character A standby performance and the character B standby performance being executed.

Examples of cases where two character standby effects are executed within the same change include the following: when the character A standby effect and the character B standby effect are executed, and then the character C standby effect is not executed; when the character B standby effect and the character C standby effect are executed without the character A standby effect being executed; and when the character A standby effect is executed, and then the character C standby effect is executed without the character B standby effect being executed.

In addition, an example of a case where all three character standby effects are executed within the same variation is a case where character B standby effect is executed after character A standby effect is executed, and then character C standby effect is executed. It will be done.

In this way, the number of times character standby effects are executed within the same variation is variable, and when two character standby effects are executed, there are a plurality of combinations.

Note that when a plurality of (in this embodiment, two or three) character standby effects are executed within the same variation, the content of the effect of the character standby effects will change. For example, when character A standby effect and character standby effect B are executed, from the state where character A is on standby (one character standby state) due to character A standby effect, character B standby effect is executed, character A The state changes to a state in which two characters, ie, character B, are on standby (a state in which two characters are on standby).

Also, for example, if character standby effect B and character C standby effect are executed without character A standby effect being executed, from the state where character B is on standby (one character standby state) due to character B standby effect, By executing the character C standby effect, two characters, character B and character C, change to a standby state (two-character standby state).

For example, if the character A standby performance, character B standby performance, and character C standby performance are all executed within the same change, the state will change from one in which character A is standby (one character standby state) due to the character A standby performance, to one in which two characters, character A and character B, are standby (two characters standby state) due to the character B standby performance being executed, and then the state will change to one in which three characters, character A, character B, and character C, are standby (three characters standby state) due to the character C standby performance being executed.

Note that if only one of the character standby effects, the character A standby effect, the character B standby effect, and the character C standby effect, is executed, the content of the character standby effect does not change. Examples of cases in which the content of the character standby effect does not change include when the character A standby effect is executed and then the character B standby effect and the character C standby effect are not executed, when the character B standby effect is executed (without the character A standby effect being executed) and then the character C standby effect is not executed, and when the character C standby effect is executed (without the character A standby effect and the character B standby effect being executed).

In this way, the content of the character standby effect is variable, but it has the characteristic that the jackpot reliability changes depending on the number of standby characters at the end of normal reach (see Figure 13 (B)). . FIG. 13(B) shows an example of the jackpot reliability of the character standby performance according to the number of standby characters that are finally on standby at the end of normal reach, and the final number of standby characters is one. The jackpot reliability of the character standby performance is approximately 5%, and the jackpot reliability of the character standby performance where the final number of characters on standby is 2 is approximately 17%, and the final number of characters on standby is 3. The reliability of the jackpot for the character standby performance is approximately 31%.

In this embodiment, since the jackpot reliability of the character standby effect and the special cut-in is set to the value illustrated in FIG. By causing this to occur, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect.

In addition, depending on whether or not there is a change in the performance content, and the performance content after the change if the production content changes, the character standby performance may be performed after the character standby performance ends, that is, after the normal reach ends. It has the following characteristics that change the flow of the performance.

When only one of the character A waiting performances, character B waiting performances, and character C waiting performances is executed, and the performance content of the character waiting performance does not change, i.e., when the normal reach ends with only one final waiting character, the reliability of the jackpot for the character waiting performance is approximately 5% (see Figure 13 (B)), and it has the characteristic that the normal reach develops into a character reach (see Figures 12 (H) and (I)). For example, if only the character A waiting performance is executed within the same change, the normal reach will develop into a character A reach. Also, if only the character B waiting performance is executed within the same change, the normal reach will develop into a character B reach. Also, if only the character C waiting performance is executed within the same change, the normal reach will develop into a character C reach.

In addition, the fact that only one character standby effect is executed, that is, the number of standby characters at the time when the character standby effect ends (in this embodiment, at the end of normal reach), means that high reliability reach is possible. This does not negate the development of character A; for example, only the character A standby performance may be executed, and the normal reach develops to character A reach, and then develops to SP reach or SPSP reach.

On the other hand, if two of the character standby effects, Character A standby effect, Character B standby effect, and Character C standby effect, are executed within the same variation and the normal reach ends with two characters in standby, the character The jackpot reliability of the standby effect is approximately 17% (see Figure 13 (B)), and it has the characteristic that it directly develops from normal reach to SP reach without going through character reach (Figure 12 (H) and (K)) reference). SP reach is a reach effect with higher jackpot reliability than character reach. In addition, although it has developed into a character reach, loss notification effects are often executed without developing into a highly reliable reach. Therefore, the player can actively operate the first performance button 35 while expecting that the number of standby characters in the character standby performance will increase to two (two characters will be on standby).

In addition, if all three character A standby effects, character B standby effects, and character C standby effects are executed within the same fluctuation, and the normal reach ends with three characters waiting, the jackpot reliability of the character standby effects will be increased. is approximately 31% (see FIG. 13(B)), and in this case, the special cut-in will occur immediately after the normal reach ends (see FIGS. 12(H) and (L)). As mentioned above, this special cut-in is an effect in which a cut-in image representing the main character appearing in SPSP Reach is superimposed, and the main character's voice saying "It's intense!" is output from the speaker 38. When a special cut-in occurs, the normal reach will directly develop into the SPSP reach without going through the character reach (see FIGS. 12(H), (L), and (M)). Therefore, the player can actively operate the first performance button 35 while expecting that the number of standby characters in the character standby performance will increase to three (that is, a state where three characters will be on standby).

FIG. 13(A) illustrates the characteristics of the character standby effect, and as described above based on FIGS. 12(H) and (I), when the character standby effect ends with one character on standby, In other words, if the number of final standby characters is one, the character reach will be greater than the character reach. In this case, although there is a possibility that a special cut-in will occur after the normal reach progresses to the character reach, the probability of its occurrence is low (for example, 3%).

In addition, as described above based on FIGS. 12(H) and (K), if the character standby effect ends with two characters waiting, that is, if the final number of standby characters is two, from the normal reach Because it develops directly to SP reach without going through character reach, the reach effect of the destination will be higher than SP reach. In this case, there is a possibility that a special cut-in will occur after the normal reach progresses to SP reach, and although the probability of this occurring is higher than when the number of final standby characters is one, it is still moderate. (e.g. 10%).

On the other hand, as described above based on FIGS. 12(H), (L), and (M), when the character standby effect ends with three characters on standby, that is, the final number of standby characters is three. In this case, the normal reach will directly develop into the SPSP reach without going through the character reach. In this case, a special cut-in occurs before the SPSP reaches reach, and in this embodiment, the probability of a special cut-in occurring is 100% when the final number of standby characters is three.

As is clear from the explanation up to this point, the more the number of final standby characters increases in the character standby effect, or in other words, the more the content of the character standby effect changes, the more likely the special cut-in will occur (the probability of special cut-in It has the characteristic of increasing the execution probability).

For example, the first probability is the probability that a special cut-in will start when the character standby effect has not changed from one character to two characters, and the character standby effect changes from one character to two characters. If the probability that a special cut-in will start after changing to standby (or standby for 3 characters) is the second probability, the second probability is higher than the first probability (see Figure 13 (A)) ).

Also, for example, the first probability is the probability that the special cut-in will start when the content of the character standby effect has not changed from 2 characters waiting to 3 characters waiting (2 characters waiting), and the character waiting If the second probability is the probability that the special cut-in will start after the production content changes from two characters waiting to three characters waiting, the second probability is higher than the first probability (Fig. 13(A)).

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has the feature that the probability of a special cut-in occurring is higher when the content of the character standby effect changes compared to when the content of the character standby effect does not change, and the probability of occurrence increases further when the content of the character standby effect changes further.

Therefore, for the first operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(B)), the second operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(D)), and the third operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12(F)), It is possible to give the player a strong motivation to operate the first performance button 35, and by changing the performance content of the character standby performance, the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special cut-in can be reduced. It is possible to improve effectively.

(Variation example regarding complex expected performance)
Regarding the composite expected performance described based on FIGS. 12 and 13, the following configuration may be adopted in other embodiments. That is, in this embodiment, a case will be explained in which a character standby effect is executed in response to an operation of the first effect button 35 for an operation promotion effect, but in other embodiments, a character standby effect is executed regardless of the operation by the player. A standby effect may also be executed.

In other embodiments, a configuration opposite to this embodiment may be adopted, in which the probability of a special cut-in occurring is higher when the content of the character standby effect does not change than when the content of the character standby effect changes. Also, a configuration opposite to this embodiment may be adopted, in which the probability of a special cut-in occurring is higher when the content of the character standby effect changes less than when the content of the character standby effect changes more than when the content of the character standby effect changes more. By adopting either or both of these configurations, it is possible to realize a highly interesting effect that makes the player expect that the content of the character standby effect will not change.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first expected performance is a character waiting performance, but the first expected performance is not limited to a character waiting performance, and may be other performances such as a stage performance in which a predetermined performance image (stage performance image) changes in stages. In addition, in this embodiment, the second expected performance is a special cut-in, but the second expected performance is not limited to a special cut-in, and may be other performances such as a group preview.

[About related productions]
Next, the related effects executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 14 to Fig. 16. Here, Fig. 14 is a screen diagram for explaining the related effects. Fig. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the related effects. Fig. 16 is a flow chart for explaining the execution period of various related effects.

Figure 14 (A) shows an example of a state in which, in a normal game state, while the first special symbol corresponding to the icon being displayed in the icon display area 72 is being displayed in a varying manner, the right row of symbols and the center row of symbols are being scrolled while the left 5 symbols are being displayed in a pseudo-stop manner. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, while the first special symbol and the effect symbols are being displayed in a varying manner in such a normal game state, a related effect window 75 may be displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 70 (see 14 (A)). This related effect window 75 is a display frame used for related effects related to various effects executed by the gaming machine 1, and related effects are executed in the area inside the related effect window 75.

As illustrated in FIG. 14(B), the related effect window 75 is divided into a past window 76, a current window 77, and a future window 78. Here, the past window 76 displays effects that have already been executed within the same variation (past This is a display frame for executing a past-related performance related to a past performance executed at a certain timing. The words "past performance" are displayed (see FIG. 14(B)). Therefore, the player can easily recognize that a past-related performance will be executed within the past window 76 by looking at the words "past performance."

The current window 77 (see FIG. 14(B)) displays the current performance (currently This is a display frame for executing the currently related production related to the current production currently being executed at the timing of , and regardless of whether or not the related production is currently being executed. The words "Current production" will be displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the related performance is currently being executed within the current window 77 by looking at the words "current performance."

The future window 78 (see FIG. 14(B)) is a display frame for executing future-related effects related to effects (future effects) that may be executed at a later timing while the first special symbol and effect symbol are being displayed in a changing manner and at the point in time when the related effect window 75 is displayed, and the words "Future effect" are displayed in the upper left corner of the future window 78 regardless of whether a future-related effect is being executed or not. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that a future-related effect will be executed in the future window 78 by seeing the words "Future effect".

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the past-related effects, present-related effects, and future-related effects are not executed automatically, but rather, a configuration is adopted in which one of the past-related effects, present-related effects, and future-related effects can be generated by a predetermined operation using the operating lever 98 (see Figure 5) while the related effects window 75 is displayed.

Different lever operations are assigned to past-related performances, present-related performances, and future-related performances, respectively, and the player operates the operating lever 78 (lever (operation), it is possible to generate a desired related effect.

As illustrated in FIG. 14(B), directly below the past window 76 is a downward arrow representing tilting the operating lever 98 to the rear (toward the front) and a lever button imitating the lever button that the operating lever 98 has. The image and will be displayed. Note that while the related effect window 75 is displayed, these downward arrows and lever button images are always displayed. Then, during the executable period of the past-related performance, the past window 76 is highlighted while these downward arrows and lever button images remain displayed. Therefore, based on the downward arrow directly below the past window 76 and the lever button image, the player can operate (press) the lever button while tilting the operating lever 98 backwards (toward the front) to perform past-related effects. You can easily recognize that this has occurred, and you can see that the past window 76 is highlighted, indicating that the operation lever 98 for the past-related performance is in effect and the past-related performance is executable. It is possible to easily recognize that

Moreover, as illustrated in FIG. 14(B), an arrow representing tilting the operating lever 98 is not displayed directly below the current window 77, and only a lever button image is displayed. Note that while the related effect window 75 is displayed, this lever button image is always displayed. Then, during the executable period of the currently related performance, the current window 77 is highlighted while the lever button image directly below the current window 77 remains displayed. Therefore, based on the lever button image directly below the current window 77, the player can operate (press) the lever button without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction (while maintaining the initial position) to display the currently related performance. You can easily recognize that this has occurred, and you can see that the window 77 is currently highlighted, indicating that the operating lever 98 for the related effect is currently in effect and the related effect is currently executable. It is possible to easily recognize that

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 14(B), an upward arrow representing tilting the operating lever 98 forward (forward) and a lever button image are displayed directly below the future window 78. Note that while the related effect window 75 is displayed, these upward arrows and lever button images are always displayed. Then, during the executable period of future-related effects, the future window 78 is highlighted while these upward arrows and lever button images remain displayed. Therefore, if the player operates (presses) the lever button while tilting the operating lever 98 forward (forward) based on the upward arrow directly below the future window 78 and the lever button image, a future-related effect will occur. You can easily recognize that the future window 78 is highlighted, and you can see that the operation lever 98 for future-related effects is in effect and the future-related effects are executable. It is possible to easily recognize that there is a

FIG. 15(A) shows an example of a past related effect being executed after a group preview (see FIG. 10(D)) is executed as a past effect. Specifically, since the jackpot reliability of the group preview is 50% or more, the player presses the lever button while tilting the operating lever 98 to the rear (toward the front), and the player can press the lever button with the control lever 98 tilted to the rear (towards the front). The past-related effect that displays the words "The confidence level is over 50%!" is exemplified in the past window 76. In this way, the player can obtain information regarding past performances by performing a predetermined operation on the operating lever 98 corresponding to the past performance.

In the example of FIG. 15(A), the jackpot reliability of the group forecast is specifically notified, so the player can know the jackpot reliability of the group forecast. Also, since the text "The previous group forecast was" is displayed in the past window 76, even if the player misses the group forecast, the player can later recognize that the group forecast had occurred, and the player can enjoy playing while hoping that the winning notification effect will be executed based on the past related effects.

FIG. 15B shows an example of how a related effect is currently being executed while a character display effect for displaying a predetermined character is being executed as the current effect. The character display effect here is such that a predetermined character displayed on the display screen 70 throws an item toward the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 71 (see FIG. 14(A)), and this item is The icon change effect is configured in response to a collision with a pending icon. Therefore, when the player presses the lever button without tilting the operating lever 98 in any direction, the current related effect that displays the text "This character will change the hold!" is displayed in the current window 77. Occurs in In this way, the player can obtain information regarding the current performance by performing a predetermined operation on the operating lever 98 corresponding to the current performance.

When the above-mentioned character display effect is performed, at the stage when a predetermined character is displayed, there is a possibility that it is not known what kind of effect will be performed by this character. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned currently related performance, what kind of performance will be performed by a predetermined character is notified before the icon change performance is performed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the current performance while understanding what kind of performance is currently being executed based on the currently related performance.

FIG. 15C shows an example of a future-related performance being executed in the future window 78 when SPSP reach is executed as a future performance. The player can select a future-related performance by pressing the lever button with the operating lever 98 tilted forward (forward). There will be a performance that will display the words ``It's it!''. Therefore, the player can easily recognize, based on the future-related performance, that there is a possibility that SPSP reach will be executed later. In this way, the player can obtain information regarding the future performance by performing a predetermined operation of the operating lever 98 corresponding to the future performance.

Even if the current pattern change ultimately develops into an SPSP reach, it is not clear at the stage before the development into an SPSP reach whether it will actually develop into an SPSP reach. In contrast, with the above-mentioned future-related effects, as long as a reach is established, it is announced that it will later develop into an SPSP reach. Therefore, based on the future-related effects, the player can easily recognize what kind of effects need to occur in order for the game to develop into an SPSP reach.

Up to this point, the past performance and the past-related performance corresponding to this past performance have been described based on FIG. 15(A), but the past performance and the past-related performance are not limited to the performance exemplified here, and may be other performances. Also, the present performance and the present-related performance corresponding to this present performance have been described based on FIG. 15(B), but the present performance and the present-related performance are not limited to the performance exemplified here, and may be other performances. Also, the future performance and the future-related performance corresponding to this future performance have been described based on FIG. 15(C), but the future performance and the future-related performance are not limited to the performance exemplified here, and may be other performances.

FIG. 16(A) is a flowchart for explaining the executable period of past-related effects. As illustrated in FIG. 16(A), when three performances, production A, production B, and production C are executed during the variable display of special symbols and production symbols, the performance related to production A as the past production The executable period of past-related performance A is the period from the end of performance A until the end of performance B. During this period, the past-related performance A can be generated by the player pressing the lever button with the operating lever 98 tilted backward (toward the front).

Further, in FIG. 16(A), after presentation B ends, presentation B becomes a new past presentation instead of presentation A. Therefore, the executable period of the past related performance B related to the performance B as the past performance is the period from the end of the performance B until the end of the performance C. During this period, the past-related performance B can be generated by the player pressing the lever button with the operating lever 98 tilted backward (toward the front).

After the end of the performance C, the performance C becomes the new past performance instead of the performance B. Therefore, the execution period of the past-related performance C related to the performance C as the past performance is the period after the end of the performance C. Note that the past-related performance is often a performance that explains the past performance, and is not a performance that directly notifies the reliability of the big win. For this reason, if the past-related performance (here, the past-related performance C) is configured to be executable even at the end of the reach performance, not only will it reduce the interest of the reach performance, but it may also be considered to be an obstacle to the reach performance. For this reason, in this embodiment, the end of the last execution period of the past-related performance during one pattern change (in the example shown in FIG. 16(A), the execution period of the past-related performance C) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) before the pattern change currently being executed ends (see FIG. 16(A)).

Figure 16 (B) is a flowchart for explaining the executable period of the currently related performance. The currently related performance is related to the currently executed performance (current performance) and is executable in parallel with the current performance. Therefore, as illustrated in Figure 16 (B), when three performances, performance A, performance B, and performance C, are executed during the variable display of the special pattern and performance pattern, the executable period of currently related performance A related to performance A as the current performance is the period from when performance A starts to when it ends, the executable period of currently related performance B related to performance B as the current performance is the period from when performance B starts to when it ends, and the executable period of currently related performance C related to performance C as the current performance is the period from when performance C starts to when it ends.

For this reason, in the example of Figure 16 (B), if the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in either direction while performance A is being performed, currently related performance A will occur, if the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in either direction while performance B is being performed, currently related performance B will occur, and if the lever button is pressed without tilting the operating lever 98 in either direction while performance C is being performed, currently related performance C will occur.

FIG. 16(C) is a flowchart for explaining the executable period of future-related effects. As illustrated in FIG. 16(C), when three performances, production A, production B, and production C are executed during the variable display of special symbols and production symbols, production A is executed immediately after the start of the symbol variation. Therefore, there is not enough time to perform future-related performance A with performance A as a future performance. Therefore, in such a case, the executable period of future-related performance A is not set. In other words, future-related performance A is not executed.

As illustrated in FIG. 16(C), the next performance to be executed after performance A is performance B. Therefore, the period from the end of performance A to the start of performance B is set as the executable period of future-related performance B related to performance B, and during this period, it is possible to generate future-related performance B by pressing the lever button with the operation lever 98 tilted forward (forward). Also, after performance B starts, performance B is no longer an unexecuted performance, so performance B is excluded from the target of future performances, and instead performance C becomes the target of future performances. Therefore, the period from the start of performance B to the start of performance C is set as the executable period of future-related performance C related to performance C, and during this period, it is possible to generate future-related performance C by pressing the lever button with the operation lever 98 tilted forward (forward) (see FIG. 16(C)).

So far, we have explained past-related effects related to past effects, present-related effects related to present effects, and future-related effects related to future effects with reference to Figures 14 to 16. However, the processing executed by the sub-CPU 91 to realize these three types of related effects (past-related effects, present-related effects, and future-related effects) will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 52 and 53.

[About the Hunt Reach]
Next, the subjugation reach effect (hereinafter, abbreviated as "subjugation reach") executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Here, Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects of the subjugation reach. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery performed in response to an operation during the subjugation reach.

In the subjugation reach in this embodiment, the judgment results of the second special symbol judgment performed during the probability variable game state are "10R probability variation" where the jackpot symbol Y1 is stopped and displayed, and "3R probability variation" where the jackpot symbol Y2 is stopped and displayed. This is a special reach performance that is executed when a variation pattern dedicated to subjugation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the case of "probable change" or loss.

As illustrated in Figure 17, subjugation reach consists of two types of button press effects called "subjugation continuous press effect" and ``pursuit continuous press effect'' in which the aim is to hit the jackpot by repeatedly pressing the button. As a result, "10R probability change" or "loss" is announced, and as a result of the pursuit continuous hit production developed from the subjugation button repeated press production, "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation", or "loss" is announced. There are cases and cases.

During the variable display of the second special symbol in which this subjugation reach is performed, the following effects are performed. First, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, and along with this, the variable display of the performance symbols (scrolling display of three symbol rows) is started (see FIG. 17(A)). Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the current symbol change, an enemy army encounter effect is displayed on the display screen 70, in which a production image showing how the own army encounters and confronts the enemy army is displayed. (See FIG. 17(B)).

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since this enemy army encounter effect was started, a subjugation button continuous press promotion effect (an example of the first operation promotion effect) is executed (see FIG. 17(C)). This subjugation button repeated press promotion production is configured as a production aiming to subdue the enemy army by repeatedly pressing the first production button 35, and during the valid period (during the first period) related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion production (during the first period), the first production button 35 is pressed repeatedly. The effect is to encourage the player to hit 35 in a row. Although not shown in the diagram, during the validity period related to the promotion effect for repeatedly pressing the subjugation button, there will be a text that explains the content of the effect, ``Subjugate the enemy army by repeatedly pressing the button!'' and a message that imitates the first effect button 35. An animation showing how the first production button image moves up and down, the words "Continuously hit!" displayed above the first production button image, and a remaining time gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed. .

When the player repeatedly presses the first performance button 35 during the valid period for such a subjugation button continuous press promotion performance, a subjugation image change performance is executed (see FIG. 17(D)). This subjugation image change production is a production that displays an animation showing how the enemy army gradually reduces the number of enemy soldiers while repeatedly attacking and defending the enemy army in response to repeated presses of the first production button 35. ing.

After such a subjugation image change production is executed, a subjugation success production (an example of the first success production: Fig. 17(E)) or subjugation failure effect (an example of the first failure effect: see FIG. 17(G)) is executed. The subjugation success production is a production that shows that your army has successfully subjugated the enemy army, and the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) is This is a performance that can only be performed if the situation is “certain change”. For this reason, when the subjugation success performance is executed, the 10R sure-change jackpot notification will be displayed in which three performance symbols showing the number of doubles of "777" are pseudo-stopped and then the real game will be stopped, which informs you that you have won the "10R sure-change". The effect is executed (see FIG. 17(F)).

The effective period for the defeat button rapid-hit promotion effect is the effective period during which the operation of the first effect button 35 is effective, and also the effective period during which the operation of the second effect button 36 is effective. In other words, during the effective period for the defeat button rapid-hit promotion effect, no operation promotion effect is performed to encourage the operation of the second effect button 36, but even if the second effect button 36 is operated, the defeat success effect and the 10R special jackpot notification effect may be executed, just as in the case of rapid pressing of the first effect button 35. In FIG. 17, the words "repeated button press or lever operation" and "10R special jackpot route" indicate that in the case of winning the "10R special jackpot", the defeat success effect and the 10R special jackpot notification effect may be executed in response to rapid pressing of the first effect button 35 or the operation of the second effect button 36.

In addition, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of this second special symbol (and production symbol) is "10R probability variation", the subjugation success performance and the 10R probability variation jackpot notification production are sure to be performed. Even if it is not executed and it is a "10R probability change", the effects after the subjugation failure effect described later may be executed.

The judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) this time is "3R probability variation", "loss", and "10R probability variation". In some cases, following the subjugation image change effect, a subjugation failure effect and an enemy army escape effect are executed (see FIGS. 17(G) and (H)). Here, the subjugation failure performance is a performance that represents the disappointment of the own army after failing to subjugate the enemy army, and the enemy army escape performance is a performance that represents the remaining enemy troops fleeing. In FIG. 17, the words "10R sure change or 3R sure change or losing route" indicate the flow of this performance.

After such a defeat failure effect and enemy escape effect have been executed, in some cases where the result of the second special pattern determination performed when the second special pattern (and the effect pattern) starts to change is a "miss", a miss notification effect may be executed in which the three effect patterns indicating a reach miss are pseudo-stopped and then stopped properly (see Figures 17 (H) and (I)).

On the other hand, there are some cases in which the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) is "3R probability variation" and "10R probability variation". , for some cases of "losing", the following effects are performed. That is, after the enemy army escape performance, an enemy army discovery performance is executed that shows how the own army chases the enemy army and discovers the escaped enemy army (see FIG. 17(J)).

Then, following this enemy army discovery performance, a pursuit button continuous press promotion performance (an example of a second operation promotion performance) is executed (see FIG. 17(K)). This pursuit button repeated press promotion effect is configured as an effect aimed at pursuing the enemy army by repeatedly pressing the first effect button 35, and during the valid period (during the second period) related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, the first effect button 35 is pressed repeatedly. The effect is to encourage the player to hit 35 in a row. Although not shown in the diagram, during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, there will be text explaining the content of the effect, ``Pursue the enemy army by repeated button presses!'' and a message that imitates the first effect button 35. An animation showing how the first production button image moves up and down, the words "Continuously hit!" displayed above the first production button image, and a remaining time gauge indicating the remaining time of the validity period are displayed. .

When the player repeatedly taps the first effect button 35 during the valid period of such a pursuit button rapid-hit promotion effect, a pursuit image change effect is executed (see FIG. 17 (L)). This pursuit image change effect is an effect that displays an animation showing the number of enemy soldiers gradually decreasing as a result of the player's army pursuing the enemy army in response to the rapid tapping of the first effect button 35.

After such a pursuit image change effect is executed, depending on whether the first effect button 35 is pressed repeatedly during the valid period for the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, a first pursuit success effect (an example of a second success effect: see FIG. 17(M)), a second pursuit success effect (an example of a second success effect: see FIG. 17(O)), or a pursuit failure effect (an example of a second failure effect: see FIG. 17(Q)) is executed.

The first successful pursuit effect (see FIG. 17(M)) is a single successful pursuit effect that shows the player's general succeeding in pursuing (annihilating) the enemy army alone, and can only be executed if the result of the second special symbol determination made at the start of the change in the second special symbol (and the effect symbol) is "3R sure change". Therefore, when the first successful pursuit effect is executed, a 3R sure change big win notification effect is executed in which three effect symbols showing the repeated numbers "333" that notify the player of a win in the "3R sure change" are displayed in a pseudo-stop state and then stopped in a real state (see FIG. 17(N)).

The 2nd successful pursuit performance (see Figure 17 (O)) is a successful joint pursuit performance that shows a successful pursuit (annihilation) of the enemy army by fighting together with allies who rushed to the rescue of one's own army. This performance is executable only when the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation of the special symbols (and performance symbols) is "10R probability change". For this reason, when the second pursuit success effect is executed, the three performance symbols showing the number of doubles of "777" are displayed in a pseudo-stop to inform you that you have won the "10R definite change", and then the actual stop is made. A jackpot notification effect is executed (see FIG. 17(P)).

As is clear from the explanation so far, if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol (and production symbol) is "10R definite change", the subjugation success production ( 17(E)) and the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17(F)), the second pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(O)) and the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17 There are times when (see (P)) is executed.

The pursuit failure performance (see Figure 17 (Q)) is a performance that represents a failure in pursuit (annihilation) of the enemy army, and the second special symbol (and performance symbol) performed at the start of the variation of this second special symbol (and performance symbol) It is executed when the judgment result of the special symbol judgment is "lost". Therefore, when the pursuit failure effect is executed, a loss notification effect is executed in which the three effect symbols indicating reach loss to notify a "loss" are displayed in a pseudo-stop state, and then the actual stop is performed (FIG. 17(R) reference).

As explained above with reference to FIG. 17, when the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)) is executed, the first pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(M)), the second pursuit success effect (See FIG. 17(O)), the pursuit failure effect (see FIG. 17(Q)) is not executed, and if the subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17(G)) is executed, the first pursuit success effect, the first 2. A successful pursuit performance or a failed pursuit performance is executed.

In this embodiment, an example is described in which two success effects (second success effects), the first and second pursuit success effects, can be executed. In other embodiments, however, a configuration in which one pursuit success effect is executed as the second success effect may be adopted. In this case, a common pursuit success effect may be executed in both the cases where the "10R special chance" is won and the "3R special chance" is won.

<About the winning probability of each successful performance lottery>
Next, the successful performance lottery executed in response to button operations during each effective period of the subjugation reach will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Here, Fig. 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery executed in response to operations during the subjugation reach.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination executed by the main CPU 81 at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in the probability variable gaming state is "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation", or , when the result is a "lose" and the variation pattern corresponding to the subjugation reach is selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 91 sets a variation performance pattern of the subjugation reach.

For example, if the "10R special" is won, a change presentation pattern (hereafter referred to as "change presentation pattern A") is set in which the presentation progresses from the defeat button rapid-hit promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(C)) to the defeat success presentation (see FIG. 17(E)), or a change presentation pattern (hereafter referred to as "change presentation pattern B") is set in which the presentation progresses from the defeat button rapid-hit promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(C)) to the defeat failure presentation (see FIG. 17(G)) and the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(K)) to the second pursuit success presentation (see FIG. 17(O)).

For example, if you win "3R Kokuhen", you can change from the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17 (C)) to the subjugation failure effect (see Fig. 17 (G)) and the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (see Fig. 17 (K)). A variable effect pattern (hereinafter referred to as "variable effect pattern C") is set in which the effect progresses to the first pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(M)) via the process (see FIG. 17(M)).

Also, for example, if the result of the second special pattern determination at the start of the change is a "miss," a change presentation pattern is set in which the presentation progresses from a promotional effect for encouraging repeated hits of the subjugation button (see FIG. 17(C)), via a failed subjugation effect (see FIG. 17(G)), to a miss notification effect (see FIG. 17(I)), or a change presentation pattern is set in which the presentation progresses from a promotional effect for encouraging repeated hits of the subjugation button (see FIG. 17(C)), via a failed subjugation effect (see FIG. 17(G)) and a promotional effect for encouraging repeated hits of the pursuit button (see FIG. 17(K)), to a failed pursuit effect (see FIG. 17(Q)).

Then, the sub-CPU 91 sends a variable presentation start command including information indicating the variable presentation pattern of the set defeat reach to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), whereby the defeat reach is executed with the presentation pattern set by the sub-CPU 91.

Here, when the sub-CPU 91 sets the variable presentation pattern A, that is, when the variable presentation pattern in which the presentation progresses from the defeat button rapid-hit promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(C)) to the defeat success presentation (see FIG. 17(E)) is set, the sub-CPU 91 executes the following process. That is, the sub-CPU 91 acquires an operation random number in response to the operation of the first presentation button 35 (or the second presentation button 36) during the valid period related to the defeat button rapid-hit promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(C)). Then, the sub-CPU 91 executes a lottery for a defeat success presentation to see whether the acquired operation random number matches a preset winning value, and executes a defeat success presentation (see FIG. 17(E)) on the condition that the defeat success presentation lottery is won.

Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 acquires the value at the time when the operation signal is output from the first effect button detection sensor 96 (or the second effect button detection sensor 97) during the valid period related to the defeat button rapid-hit promotion effect as the operation random number, which is appropriately updated by the random number update process in the sub-control board 90, and stores it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93. Then, it executes a defeat success effect lottery to determine whether the operation random number stored in the specified area matches any of the random number values stored in the sub-ROM 92.

In this embodiment, the possible values of the operation random number are set to 100 values from "0" to "99", and 20 random number values (winning values) are stored for the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period for the effect of promoting repeated hits of the defeat button, and 10 random number values (winning values) are stored for the second or subsequent operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period for the effect of promoting repeated hits of the defeat button.

When the first effect button 35 is operated for the first time during the valid period related to the subjugation button rapid-hit promotion effect, i.e., when the first operation signal is output from the first effect button detection sensor 96 during this valid period, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the subjugation success effect based on whether or not the operation random number stored in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93 matches any of the 20 random number values. Here, if the acquired and stored operation random number matches any of the 20 random number values, the subjugation success effect is executed immediately after the subjugation image change effect is executed.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the successful defeat effect will not be executed for the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the valid period for the defeat button rapid-hit promotion effect, i.e., if the acquired and stored operation random number does not match any of the above 20 random number values, it ends the processing related to the successful defeat effect lottery without executing the successful defeat effect after executing the defeat image change effect.

Then, when the first effect button 35 is operated for the second or subsequent time during the valid period for the subjugation button rapid-hit promotion effect, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the subjugation success effect based on whether or not the operation random number acquired in response to that operation matches any of the 10 random number values (winning values). Here, if the acquired and stored operation random number matches any of the 10 random number values, the subjugation success effect is executed immediately after the subjugation image change effect is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the operation random number can take the above-mentioned 100 random values, 20 random values are stored for the first operation of the first performance button 35. Ten random numbers are stored for the second and subsequent operations. Therefore, the probability that a successful subjugation performance will be executed in response to the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the valid period for the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance is 20% (=20/100×100), The probability that the subjugation success performance will be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the button press promotion performance is 10% (=10/100×100) (Figure 18 (See (A)).

In this embodiment, the subjugation success effect lottery is executed every time the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect, and if the subjugation successful effect lottery is unsuccessful, the subjugation image change effect is executed. If the successful subjugation effect lottery is won, the subjugation image change effect and the successful subjugation effect are executed. Therefore, even if the player operates the first performance button 35, if it is difficult to win the successful subjugation performance lottery, only the subjugation image change performance will be repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, when the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the defeat button successive tap promotion effect, that is, when an operation signal is output from the second effect button detection sensor 97 during this valid period, the sub-CPU 91 acquires an operation random number and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93, in the same manner as when the first effect button 35 is operated. In this embodiment, when the second effect button 36 is operated, the operation random number is configured to be able to take the above-mentioned 100 random number values, in the same manner as when the first effect button 35 is operated. And, in the sub-ROM 92, the same random number value as the 100 random number value that the operation random number can take is stored as a winning value with respect to the operation of the second effect button 36. Therefore, the probability that the defeat success effect is executed when the second effect button 36 is operated is 100% (= 100 / 100 x 100), and if the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the defeat button successive tap promotion effect, the defeat success effect will always be executed (see FIG. 18 (A)).

Therefore, if the successful suppression effect is not executed even if the first effect button 35 is operated several times during the valid period for the continuous press promotion effect of the subjugation button (see FIG. 17(C)), the player may By operating the performance button 36, it is possible to easily generate a subjugation success performance. In addition, if the player wants to know quickly whether or not the successful subjugation effect will be executed, the player can press the second effect button 35 without operating the first effect button 35 during the valid period related to the continuous press promotion effect of the subjugation button. By operating , it is possible to quickly find out whether or not the subjugation success production will be executed.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(A), no winning value is prepared for the successful defeat effect lottery for the second or subsequent operation of the second effect button 36 during the valid period for the successful defeat button press promotion effect. Therefore, the successful defeat effect will not be executed in response to the second or subsequent operation of the second effect button 36 during the valid period for the successful defeat button press promotion effect.

In this embodiment, an example is described in which the operation of the second effect button 36 is valid only once during the valid period of the defeat button rapid-hit promotion effect, regardless of whether the first effect button 35 is operated or not. However, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation of the second effect button 36 is valid on the condition that the number of times the first effect button 35 is operated during the valid period of the defeat button rapid-hit promotion effect reaches a predetermined number.

Here, with reference to FIG. 18(A), the subjugation success effect lottery and the subjugation success effect lottery performed when the first effect button 35 (or second effect button 36) is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect. Although the probability of winning has been explained, this subjugation success effect lottery is performed only when the variable effect pattern A is selected as the variable effect pattern of the subjugation reach. In other words, even if the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the second special symbol in which the subjugation reach is executed is "10R probability change", the subjugation button repeated press is promoted as the variation production pattern of the subjugation reach. From the performance (see Figure 17(C)) to the subjugation failure performance (see Figure 17(G)) and the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance (see Figure 17(K)), the second pursuit success performance (see Figure 17(O)) When variable performance pattern B in which the performance progresses to (see) is set, a configuration is adopted in which the successful subjugation performance lottery is not executed so that the successful subjugation performance is not executed. Therefore, when variable performance pattern B is set as a variable performance pattern for subjugation reach, no matter how many times the first performance button 35 or second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. Also, the subjugation success effect is not executed, and the subjugation image change effect is executed every time an operation is performed.

Next, when the result of the second special pattern determination performed at the start of the change of the second special pattern for executing the subjugation reach is "10R sure change" and change presentation pattern B is set as the change presentation pattern of the subjugation reach, in which the presentation progresses from the subjugation button rapid-hit promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(C)) via the subjugation failure presentation (see FIG. 17(G)) and the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(K)) to the second pursuit success presentation (see FIG. 17(O)), the following will explain the second pursuit success presentation lottery that is executed during the valid period for this pursuit button rapid-hit promotion presentation.

In this embodiment, when the "10R probability change" is won and the subjugation reach progresses to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, the first effect button 35 is operated in accordance with the valid period of this pursuit button repeated press promotion effect. 2 pursuit success effect lottery is executed by the sub CPU 91. When the first performance button 35 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the sub CPU 91 acquires an operation random number and stores it in a predetermined value in the sub RAM 93, similarly to during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. Store in area.

On the other hand, the sub ROM 92 stores 10 random values (winning values) for the second pursuit success performance lottery regarding the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. are stored, and 15 winning values are stored for the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 18(B), the probability that the second pursuit success performance will be executed in response to the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the validity period of the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is 10% (=10/100×100), and the probability that the second pursuit success performance will be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is 15. % (=15/100×100).

If the second pursuit success effect lottery is not won, the pursuit image change effect is executed, and if the second pursuit success effect lottery is won in response to the next or subsequent operation of the first effect button 35, the pursuit image change effect and the second pursuit success effect are executed. In other words, the pursuit image change effect is executed repeatedly each time the first effect button 35 is operated until the second pursuit success effect lottery is won.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(B), the winning value for the second pursuit success performance lottery is not prepared for the operation of the second performance button 36 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. do not have. That is, even if the second performance button 36 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the second pursuit success performance lottery is not executed, and the second performance button 36 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. The second pursuit success effect is not executed in response to the operation.

On the other hand, if you win "3R Definitely" and the subjugation reach progresses to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect, the first pursuit success will be achieved according to the operation of the first performance button 35 during the valid period of this pursuit button repeated press promotion effect. The performance lottery is executed by the sub CPU 91. When the first performance button 35 is operated during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the sub CPU 91 acquires an operation random number and stores it in a predetermined value in the sub RAM 93, similarly to during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. Store in area.

On the other hand, the sub ROM 92 stores 5 random numbers (winning values) for the first pursuit success performance lottery regarding the first operation of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. are stored, and 20 winning values are stored for the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance. Therefore, as illustrated in FIG. 18(C), the probability that the first pursuit success effect will be executed in response to the first operation of the first effect button 35 during the validity period of the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect is 5% (=5/100×100), and the probability that the first pursuit success performance will be executed in response to the second and subsequent operations of the first performance button 35 during the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is 20. % (=20/100×100).

If the first pursuit success effect lottery is not won, the pursuit image change effect is executed, and if the first pursuit success effect lottery is won in response to the next or subsequent operation of the first effect button 35, the pursuit image change effect and the first pursuit success effect are executed. In other words, the pursuit image change effect is executed repeatedly each time the first effect button 35 is operated until the first pursuit success effect lottery is won.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 18(C), no winning value is prepared for the lottery for the first successful pursuit effect when the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion effect. In other words, even if the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion effect, the lottery for the first successful pursuit effect is not executed, and the first successful pursuit effect is not executed in response to the operation of the second effect button 36 during the valid period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion effect.

In this way, if the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance, the subjugation success performance (see FIG. 17(E)) may be executed in accordance with the operation. On the other hand, if the second performance button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance, the first pursuit success performance and the second pursuit success performance are executed in accordance with the operation. Never.

So far, the subjugation reach has been explained based on FIGS. 17 and 18, but the processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize this subjugation reach will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 49, 54, 55, etc.

[About the type of jackpot random number and advance judgment information]
Next, the types of jackpot random numbers and advance determination information will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. Here, FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the preliminary determination information, FIG. 19(A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the type of jackpot random number and the jackpot preliminary determination information, and FIG. ) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various types of preliminary determination information included in the hold command transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 when the reserved number of the first special symbol judgment has not reached the upper limit, the main CPU 81 acquires a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a change pattern random number. Here, the jackpot random number is acquired information used to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game, and the symbol random number is type information for determining the type of jackpot (such as the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends). The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to execute a reach performance or a reach-less performance when it is determined that a jackpot game will not be executed, and the change pattern random number is a random number for determining the change pattern of the special symbol. These jackpot random numbers, symbol random numbers, reach random numbers, and change pattern random numbers are also acquired when a game ball enters the second starting hole 22 when the reserved number of the second special symbol judgment has not reached the upper limit.

If a game ball enters the first start hole 21 (or the second start hole 22) in a situation where a special pattern determination cannot be made immediately, such as when a special pattern is being displayed in a changing state or when a jackpot game is being played, the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and change pattern random number obtained in response to this winning are stored in a specified area of the main RAM 83 as information reserving the right to make a special pattern determination. This specified area of the main RAM 83 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28.

In this way, when the right for special symbol determination is reserved, the main CPU 81 executes a preliminary determination process as to whether or not to execute a jackpot game, prior to executing the special symbol determination corresponding to the right. do. Specifically, when a jackpot random number etc. is obtained in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22), the obtained jackpot random number is a winning number stored in advance in the main ROM 82. It is determined in advance whether or not a jackpot game will be executed based on whether or not the value matches the value.

(Classification of jackpot random numbers obtained in low probability state)
Here, a jackpot random number obtained in response to a game ball winning in the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22) in a low probability state (in this embodiment, a normal gaming state or a time-saving gaming state) As illustrated in FIG. 19(A), the "confirmed winning random number" (an example of the first acquired information), the "provisional losing random number" (an example of the second acquired information), and the "confirmed losing random number" ,are categorized.

As described above with reference to FIG. 6(A), in this embodiment, for the low probability state, four random number values from "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values", and 836 random number values from "4" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "losing values". For the high probability state (the high probability state in this embodiment), 14 random number values from "0" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values", and 826 random number values from "14" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "losing values".

Here, out of the total of 840 random numbers from "0" to "839", the four random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for both the low probability state and the high probability state (see FIG. 6 (A)). This means that if the acquired jackpot random number is any of "0" to "3", it will be determined as a "jackpot" regardless of whether the state when the special symbol determination is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state. For this reason, the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3" acquired and stored as information reserving the right to special symbol determination in a low probability state can be classified as "winning random numbers" because they match the "winning values" and are determined as a "jackpot" regardless of whether the state when the special symbol determination corresponding to that right is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state, as shown in FIG. 19 (A).

On the other hand, of the total 840 random number values from "0" to "839," the 10 random number values from "4" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "losing values" for the low probability state, and as "winning values" for the high probability state, as illustrated in Fig. 6(A). This means that when the acquired jackpot random number is any of "4" to "13," if the state when the special symbol determination is executed is a low probability state, it is determined to be a "miss," and if the state when the special symbol determination is executed is a high probability state, it is determined to be a "jackpot." For this reason, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13" acquired and stored as information reserving the right to make a special symbol determination in a low probability state are judged as "misses" because they match the "losing value" if the state when the special symbol determination corresponding to that right is executed is a low probability state (the same as when the ball enters the starting hole), as shown in FIG. 19(A), whereas they match the "winning value" and are judged as "jackpots" if the state when the special symbol determination corresponding to that right is executed has changed from a low probability state to a high probability state. For this reason, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13" acquired and stored as information reserving the right to make a special symbol determination in a low probability state are judged as "misses" if the special symbol determination is executed while in a low probability state, and are judged as "jackpots" if the special symbol determination is executed after transitioning to a high probability state, and therefore can be classified as "provisional miss random numbers."

In addition, out of a total of 840 random numbers from "0" to "839," 826 random numbers from "14" to "839" are the "rejection value" for both the low probability state and the high probability state. " is stored in the main ROM 82 (see FIG. 6(A)). This means that if the acquired jackpot random number is one of "14" to "839", regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state. This means that it will be judged as a "lose". Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" that are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when the probability is low correspond to that right, as shown in Figure 19 (A). Regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state, it matches the "rejection value" and is determined to be a "lose", so the "loss confirmed random number" It can be classified into

(Classification of jackpot random numbers obtained in high probability state)
As illustrated in FIG. 19(A), the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 21 (or second starting port 22) in the high probability state is The random numbers are classified into "determined random numbers,""provisional winning random numbers" (an example of the second acquired information), and "determined loss random numbers."

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the four random numbers "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for both the low probability state and the high probability state. is stored (see FIG. 6(A)). Therefore, the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3", which are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when in a high probability state, correspond to the right, as shown in FIG. 19(A). Regardless of whether the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is a low probability state or a high probability state, it will match the "winning value" and be judged as a "jackpot", so when the state is low probability state Similar to the jackpot random numbers "0" to "3" that are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols, these can be classified as "confirmed hit random numbers."

Furthermore, as described above, in this embodiment, the 10 random numbers "4" to "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for high probability states, and "lost values" for low probability states. value" is stored in the main ROM 82. This means that if the jackpot random number obtained in the high probability state is one of "4" to "13", the state when the special symbol judgment is executed is (any of these jackpot random numbers). If it is in a high probability state (same as when the is obtained), it is determined as a "jackpot", and for example, by winning a normal jackpot, the state when special symbol determination is executed changes from a high probability state to a low probability state. If it changes, it means that it is judged as a "lose". From this, the jackpot random numbers "4" to "13", which are acquired and stored as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols when in a high probability state, are If it is determined to be a "jackpot" and the special symbol determination is executed after transitioning to a low probability state, it is determined to be a "loss", and therefore it can be classified as a "temporary hit random number".

As described above, of the total of 840 random numbers from "0" to "839," 826 random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "losing values" for both low and high probability states. For this reason, the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" acquired and stored as information reserving the right to determine a special symbol in a high probability state match the "losing values" and are determined to be "losing" regardless of whether the state when the special symbol determination corresponding to that right is executed is a low or high probability state, as shown in FIG. 19(A), and therefore can be classified as "definitely losing" random numbers, just like the jackpot random numbers "14" to "839" acquired and stored as information reserving the right to determine a special symbol in a low probability state.

In a low probability state, the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed if the jackpot random number obtained when the ball enters the starting hole is a "guaranteed winning random number," but determines that a jackpot game will not be executed if the jackpot random number obtained when the ball enters the starting hole is a "provisional losing random number" or a "guaranteed losing random number." On the other hand, in a high probability state, the main CPU 81 determines that a jackpot game will be executed if the jackpot random number obtained when the ball enters the starting hole is either a "guaranteed winning random number," "provisional losing random number," or "provisional winning random number," and determines that a jackpot game will not be executed if the jackpot random number obtained when the ball enters the starting hole is a "guaranteed losing random number."

The main CPU 81 converts various random numbers such as a jackpot random number into a first special symbol determination (or a second special When acquired and stored as information for reserving the rights (symbol determination), the sub-control board 90 sends a reservation command containing jackpot preliminary determination information (“confirmed hit information,” “provisional loss information,” or “confirmed loss information”) Send to.

Here, the "confirmed hit information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol when the probability is low is the "confirmed hit random number." "Temporary loss information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a low probability state is a "provisional loss random number." "Loss confirmation information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a low probability probability state is a "loss confirmation random number."

In this way, since the main control board 80 sends the sub-control board 90 a pending command that includes jackpot preliminary determination information in a low probability state, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 receives information included in this pending command. Based on the preliminary jackpot determination information provided, it is possible to easily identify what the determination result will be if the suspended special symbol determination is executed at the time the suspension command is received. .

For example, when a hold command including "confirmed win information" is received as the jackpot advance judgment information, it is possible to easily specify that when a special pattern judgment corresponding to the hold command is executed based on this "confirmed win information", it will be judged as a "jackpot" regardless of whether the state at that time is a low probability state or a high probability state. Also, when a hold command including "provisional miss information" is received as the jackpot advance judgment information, it is possible to easily specify that when a special pattern judgment corresponding to the hold command is executed based on this "provisional miss information", it will be judged as a "miss" if the state at that time is a low probability state, and it will be judged as a "jackpot" if the state at that time is a high probability state. Also, when a hold command including "confirmed miss information" is received as the jackpot advance judgment information, it is possible to easily specify that when a special pattern judgment corresponding to the hold command is executed based on this "confirmed miss information", it will be judged as a "miss" regardless of whether the state at that time is a low probability state or a high probability state.

When the main CPU 81 acquires and stores various random numbers such as a jackpot random number as information reserving the right to determine the second special pattern (or the first special pattern) in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 22 (or the first starting hole 21) during a high probability state, it transmits a reserve command including jackpot pre-determination information ("confirmed win information", "provisional win information", or "confirmed miss information") to the sub-control board 90.

Here, the "confirmed hit information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a high probability state is the "confirmed hit random number." "Temporary hit information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a high probability state is a "tentative win random number." "Loss confirmation information" is information that notifies that the jackpot random number acquired as information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol in a high probability state is a "loss confirmation random number."

In this way, since the main control board 80 sends the sub-control board 90 a pending command that includes jackpot advance determination information in a high probability state, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 receives information that is included in this pending command. Based on the preliminary jackpot determination information provided, it is possible to easily identify what the determination result will be if the suspended special symbol determination is executed at the time the suspension command is received. .

For example, if a pending command that includes "provisional winning information" is received as jackpot preliminary judgment information in a high probability state, and a special symbol judgment corresponding to the pending command is executed based on this "temporary winning information", , if the state at that time remains a high probability state, it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the state at that time changes from a high probability state to a low probability state, it will be determined as a "lose". It is possible to specify

The sub-CPU 91 can accurately determine the relationship between the state at the time of the reserved elimination (low probability state or high probability state) and the determination result when a special pattern determination is performed, based on the jackpot advance determination information contained in the reserved command received from the main control board 80, and can appropriately control the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the result of the advance determination process based on this determination result.

Figure 19 (B) shows an example of various pre-determination information transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 in the form of a hold command together with the jackpot pre-determination information described based on Figure 19 (A). The main CPU 81 executes a predetermined pre-determination process based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to the start port winning, and transmits a hold command to the sub-control board 90 including winning start port information, jackpot pre-determination information, jackpot type pre-determination information, fluctuation pattern information, and game status information as information indicating the results of this pre-determination process.

Here, the winning starting hole information is whether various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers were acquired when the game ball entered the first starting hole 21, or whether the winning starting hole information was obtained when the game ball entered the second starting hole 22. This information indicates whether the information was acquired as a result of an event.

The jackpot advance judgment information is as described above with reference to FIG. 19(A), and when the right to judge the special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball entering the first start hole 21 (or the second start hole 22) in a low probability state, "confirmed win information", "provisional win information", or "confirmed miss information" is sent to the sub-control board 90 as jackpot advance judgment information (see FIG. 19(B)). Also, when the right to judge the special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball entering the first start hole 21 (or the second start hole 22) in a high probability state, "confirmed win information", "provisional win information", or "confirmed miss information" is sent to the sub-control board 90 as jackpot advance judgment information (see FIG. 19(B)).

The jackpot type preliminary determination information is information indicating what type of jackpot is. As described above with reference to FIG. 6A, for the low probability state, four random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored in the main ROM 82 as winning values. For this reason, with conventional pachinko gaming machines, when a jackpot game is executed, the jackpot random number obtained when the probability is low matches any of the above winning values of "0" to "3". If it is determined, the type of jackpot (special game) is specified based on the pattern random number acquired together with this jackpot random number, and the type of jackpot (special game) is specified, and the identified Information indicating the type of jackpot is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in a form included in the pending command.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot random number acquired in the low probability state is the "confirmed hit random number" (in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3": FIG. 19(A) (see FIG. 19A), but not only when the jackpot random number obtained in the low probability state is a "temporary loss random number" (in this embodiment, any one of "4" to "13": see FIG. 19(A)). Also, the type of jackpot (special game) is specified based on the symbol random number acquired together with this jackpot random number. Then, a command to suspend the preliminary determination information (jackpot preliminary determination information) indicating the result of preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the jackpot game and the information (special game information) indicating the type of the specified jackpot (jackpot game) This pending command is sent to the sub-control board 90.

As is clear from FIG. 6(A), in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, random numbers between "4" and "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "losing values" for the low probability state. Therefore, when a jackpot random number obtained in a low probability state is stored as information reserving the right to make a special symbol determination, that is, when a "provisional losing random number" is obtained and stored in a low probability state, if the state when a special symbol determination corresponding to the reserved right is made is the same low probability state as when the right to make this special symbol determination was reserved, this special symbol determination will determine that it is a "loss."

However, the random number values between "4" and "13" are stored in the main ROM 82 as "winning values" for the high probability state (see FIG. 6(A)). For this reason, after a "tentative losing random number" is acquired and stored in a low probability state, for example, if the result of the previously reserved special pattern determination becomes a "guaranteed jackpot", changing the state from a low probability state to a high probability state, and a special pattern determination based on the above "tentative losing random number" is performed in a high probability state, the result of this special pattern determination will be a "jackpot".

In other words, the "provisional losing random number" obtained in a low probability state basically matches the "losing value," but if the state when the special pattern determination based on this "provisional losing random number" is executed has changed from a low probability state to a high probability state, it will match the "winning value" rather than the "losing value," so it can be said to be a winning random number with an element of uncertainty.

For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, not only when the jackpot pre-determination information in the low probability state is "confirmed win information" (i.e., when the jackpot random number acquired in the low probability state is a "confirmed win random number"), but also when the jackpot pre-determination information in the low probability state is "provisional loss information" (i.e., when the jackpot random number acquired in the low probability state is a "provisional loss random number"), the type of jackpot (jackpot game) is identified based on the pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, and jackpot type pre-determination information indicating this identification result is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 together with the jackpot pre-determination information (here, "confirmed win information" or "provisional loss information").

Figure 20 (A) shows an example of a state in which three reserved icons, Special Chart 1 1 Reserve, Special Chart 1 2 Reserve, and Special Chart 1 3 Reserve, are displayed as reserved icons indicating that the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved when the game is controlled in the normal game state (low probability state). Here, for Special Chart 1 3 Reserve, a "provisional miss random number" is obtained, and "provisional miss information" is obtained as the jackpot advance determination information. Therefore, as is clear from the notation in Figure 19 (A), if the reserve corresponding to Special Chart 1 3 Reserve is consumed while in the low probability state, it will be determined as a "miss."

However, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 20(A), since the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 1 first reservation is "5R probability change", it corresponds to the special symbol 1 third reservation. Before the reservation is exhausted, specifically, at the time when the jackpot game corresponding to the first reservation of special figure 1 ends, the state will shift from the low probability state to the high probability state, and as a result, the special figure 1 The determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the third pending is a "jackpot".

In contrast, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a "tentative loss random number" is obtained in a low probability state and "tentative loss information" is obtained as jackpot pre-determination information, the main control board 80 transmits jackpot type pre-determination information indicating the type of jackpot (jackpot game) to the sub-control board 90 together with the "tentative loss information" indicating a loss.

For this reason, the sub CPU 91 of the sub control board 90, at the time when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the third reservation of the special symbol 1 is suspended, although the determination result is "lost", there is a high probability that the determination result will be "lost" before the suspension is If the state shifts to the state, it becomes a "jackpot", and it is possible to specify the type of jackpot based on the provisional loss information and the jackpot type preliminary determination information.

As a result, the sub CPU 91 is able to execute an icon change effect as illustrated in FIG. 21 regarding the special figure 1 third hold based on receiving the hold command related to the special figure 1 third hold. It is. FIG. 21 illustrates a state in which a red pending icon is displayed as the first pending special figure 1 because the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the first pending special figure 1 is "5R probability change". has been done. In addition, in FIG. 21, the first special symbol judgment corresponding to the special figure 1 third hold is performed in a high probability state, and the judgment result is a "jackpot", so the special figure 1 third hold is expanded/reduced. In this example, the icon is displayed as an enlargement/reduction hold icon that repeats the process, and a message saying "If the probability is changing, you might win!" is displayed above the enlargement/reduction hold icon.

In this way, in this embodiment, even when a "provisional miss random number" is obtained in a low probability state and the jackpot advance judgment information becomes "provisional miss information," that is, even when it is basically a "miss," but would become a "jackpot" if it had transitioned from a low probability state to a high probability state before the reserved amount was consumed, it is possible to provide an opportunity for a pre-reading performance.

In addition, here, we have explained the case where an icon change effect using a pending icon is executed based on "temporary loss information" and "jackpot type pre-determination information", but other pre-reading based on this information is explained. It is also possible to perform a performance.

Returning to the explanation of the "jackpot type advance judgment information" in FIG. 19, when a start winning occurs in a low probability state (when a game ball wins in the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22), the main CPU 81 transmits the jackpot type advance judgment information together with the winning confirmation information or the provisional loss information to the sub-control board 90. This is as described above.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 obtains a "definitely losing random number" in response to a start winning in a low probability state and transmits "definitely losing information" indicating that this "definitely losing random number" has been obtained to the sub-control board 90, it does not transmit the jackpot type pre-determination information. This is because when a "definitely losing random number" is obtained, the special pattern determination based on this "definitely losing random number" is determined to be a "loss" regardless of whether the state is a low probability state or a high probability state, so there is no need to notify the sub-control board 90 of the type of jackpot.

Next, we will explain how to handle the jackpot type pre-determination information when a game ball enters the second start hole 22 (or the first start hole 21) in a high probability state. When a start ball enters in such a high probability state, the main CPU 81 performs control such that it transmits "jackpot type information" together with "confirmed win information" or "provisional win information" to the sub-control board 90, but does not transmit "jackpot type information" when it transmits "confirmed miss information" (see FIG. 19 (B)).

When a winning is started in a high probability state and a "confirmed hit random number" is acquired, the main CPU 81 controls the "jackpot type preliminary determination information" together with the "confirmed win information" (see FIG. 19(A)). It is transmitted to the board 90 (see FIG. 19(B)). This means that when a "confirmed hit random number" is obtained, regardless of whether the state when special symbol judgment is executed based on this confirmed hit random number is a high probability state or a low probability state. This is because it will be a jackpot.

In addition, if a starting prize is won in a high probability state and a "provisional winning random number" is acquired, the main CPU 81 outputs "jackpot type preliminary determination information" together with "temporary winning information" (see FIG. 19(A)). It is transmitted to the sub control board 90 (see FIG. 19(B)). This means that if a "temporary hit random number" is obtained in a high probability state, and the state when special symbol determination is executed based on this "temporary win random number" remains in the high probability state, it will be a "jackpot", This is basically because it needs to be the target of a look-ahead presentation.

The fluctuation pattern information (see FIG. 19(B)) is information that indicates the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. When the right to determine the first special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball winning the first starting hole 21, information that indicates the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, when the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved in response to the game ball winning the second starting hole 22, information that indicates the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. The game status information is information that indicates the game status of the gaming machine 1 at the time when the jackpot random number or the like is obtained as a result of the start winning.

In FIG. 20(B), when the game is controlled in a variable probability gaming state (high probability state), the special symbol 2 first A state in which four pending icons, ie, pending, special drawing 2 second holding, special drawing 2 third holding, and special drawing 2 fourth holding, are displayed is illustrated. Here, regarding the 4th reservation of special drawing 2, the "temporary hit random number" is acquired and the "temporary hit information" is acquired as the jackpot preliminary judgment information, so it is clear from the notation in FIG. 19 (A) As such, if the hold corresponding to the fourth hold of special drawing 2 is exhausted in a high probability state, it will be determined as a "jackpot".

However, as is clear from the notation in Figure 20(B), since the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special figure 2 second reservation is "3R normal", it corresponds to the special figure 2 fourth reservation. Before the hold is exhausted, specifically, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special figure 2 second hold becomes a time-saving game state (low probability state), and as a result, the special figure 2 second hold is The determination result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to 4-holding is "lose".

In such a case, a hold command including "provisional win information" is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 regarding the right to determine the second special pattern for the fourth reservation of special chart 2. Based on this "provisional win information" and the state when the second special pattern determination for the fourth reservation of special chart 2 is executed (a low probability state in the example shown in FIG. 20(B)), the sub-CPU 91 can also execute performance control such as not subjecting the right to determine the second special pattern for the fourth reservation of special chart 2 to a pre-reading performance.

<Special chart 2: Jackpot suggestion within the reservation>
22 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the special chart 2 reserved jackpot suggestion performance. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the reserved second special pattern judgment right includes a "probable jackpot" at the time when the third round of the jackpot game is started, the special chart 2 reserved jackpot suggestion performance may be executed during the third round of the round game (see FIG. 22(A)). FIG. 22(A) illustrates the execution of the special chart 2 reserved jackpot suggestion performance, which displays a reserved jackpot suggestion background different from the normal round background as a background image displayed on the display screen 70 in order to suggest that the reserved second special pattern judgment right includes a "probable jackpot".

In addition, in FIG. 22(B), a message is displayed on the display screen 70 to suggest that the reserved second special symbol determination right includes a "normal jackpot". As a background image, a special drawing 2 pending normal jackpot suggestion performance that displays a pending normal jackpot suggestion background that is different from the normal round background is illustrated.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 19, when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 22 in a high probability state and a "winning random number" or a "provisional winning random number" is obtained, that is, when "winning information" or "provisional winning information" is obtained as the jackpot advance judgment information, the jackpot type advance judgment information is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 together with the "winning information" or "provisional winning information." Therefore, it is possible to execute an accurate special symbol 2 reserved jackpot suggestion performance based on the jackpot type advance judgment information, taking into account the state at the time of the reserved consumption corresponding to the reserved right to judge the second special symbol.

Up to this point, based on FIGS. 19 to 22, we have explained the type of jackpot random number, various advance determination information, icon change effect using a pending icon, and effect suggesting a jackpot within special figure 2 reservation. In order to realize these effects, The preliminary determination process executed by the main CPU 81 will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 31 and 32. Further, the processing executed by the sub CPU 91 to realize these effects will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 42 and 43.

[Chance production and suggestive production]
Next, the chance presentation and the suggestion presentation executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 23 and 24. Here, Fig. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the chance presentation and the suggestion presentation. Fig. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability and features of the chance presentation and the suggestion presentation.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a chance effect (one example of an expected effect) and a suggestive effect may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state. The chance effect is an effect that makes the player expect that a winning notification effect will be executed. In this embodiment, the chance effect has a jackpot reliability of about 25%, so that even if the chance effect is executed alone, there is a chance of expecting a jackpot (see FIG. 24). In other words, even if a suggestive effect is not executed after the chance effect, a jackpot can be expected. In this way, because the chance effect has a relatively high jackpot reliability, the player can enjoy playing the game while hoping that a winning notification effect will be executed based on the occurrence of the chance effect.

The chance effect may be any effect that can make the player expect that a winning notification effect will be executed, but in this embodiment, it is configured as an effect in which an effect image showing a predetermined character uttering the line "Chance!" is displayed on the display screen 70 and the sound "Chance!" is output from the speaker 38. In this embodiment, an example is described in which there is one type of chance effect, but, for example, multiple types of chance effects with different performance modes may be prepared, and when a chance effect is executed, one of the chance effects may be selected and executed.

The suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that a winning notification performance will be executed, and in this embodiment, two types of suggestion performance are prepared: a low suggestion performance and a high suggestion performance (see FIG. 24). Here, the low suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a winning notification performance will be executed, and that the possibility of this is relatively low. On the other hand, the highly suggestive performance is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that a winning notification performance will be executed, and that the possibility is relatively high. In other words, when comparing a low-suggestive performance and a high-suggestive performance, the high-suggestive performance has a higher jackpot reliability than the low-suggestive performance.

In this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 24, three types of low suggestion effects are prepared as low suggestion effects: a first low suggestion effect, a second low suggestion effect, and a third low suggestion effect, which are classified into a low suggestion effect group. When a low suggestion effect is executed, one of the three types of low suggestion effects classified into the low suggestion effect group is selected and executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first low suggestion effect is set to approximately 3%, the jackpot reliability of the second low suggestion effect is set to approximately 5%, and the jackpot reliability of the third low suggestion effect is set to approximately 7%.

The first low-suggestion performance, the second low-suggestion performance, and the third low-suggestion performance in this embodiment are all configured as a character display performance that displays the words “Look forward to it!” on the display screen 70. In addition, the font colors are different in the first low-suggestion performance, the second low-suggestion performance, and the third low-suggestion performance. Specifically, the first low suggestion effect is a text display effect that displays the words "Look forward to it!" in black, and the second low suggestion effect is a text display effect that displays the words "Look forward to it!" in blue. This is a display effect, and the third low suggestion effect is a text display effect that displays the words "Look forward to it!" in yellow.

It goes without saying that the three types of low suggestion effects exemplified here are merely examples, and the first low suggestion effect, the second low suggestion effect, and the third low suggestion effect may be other effects other than the text display effect, so long as they can indicate that the possibility of a winning notification being executed is relatively low. Furthermore, the types of low suggestion effects are not limited to three, and may be one, two, four or more types.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the highly suggestive performances, as illustrated in FIG. Three types of highly suggestive performances are prepared, and when a highly suggestive performance is executed, one of the three types of highly suggestive performances classified into a highly suggestive performance group is selected and executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the first highly suggestive effect is set to approximately 31%, the jackpot reliability of the second highly suggestive effect is approximately 36%, and the jackpot reliability of the third highly suggestive effect is set to approximately 42%. There is.

The first highly suggestive effect, the second highly suggestive effect, and the third highly suggestive effect in this embodiment are all effect images in which a cut-in image showing the words "Great Chance!" is being displayed on the display screen 70. These highly suggestive effects have different font colors. Specifically, the first highly suggestive effect is a cut-in effect that displays the words "Great Chance!" in green, and the second highly suggestive effect is a cut-in effect that displays the words "Great Chance!" in orange. The third highly suggestive effect is a cut-in effect that displays the words ``Great Chance!'' in red.

Note that the three types of high suggestion performances illustrated here are just examples, and the first high suggestion performance, the second high suggestion performance, and the third high suggestion performance have a relative probability that a winning notification will be executed. It goes without saying that other effects than the cut-in effects may be used as long as they can suggest that the performance is high. Further, the types of highly suggestive effects are not limited to three types, but may be one type, two types, four or more types.

Regarding such chance performance and suggestion performance, the performance proceeds as follows. First, when the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is executed, symbol variation is started to variably display the effect symbols in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 23(A)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of symbol variation, the above-mentioned chance effect may be executed (see FIGS. 23(A) and 23(B)).

Note that the low-suggestion performance and high-suggestion performance described above have the following characteristics. That is, each low-suggestion performance classified into the low-suggestion performance group has a characteristic that there are times when it is combined with a chance performance and times when it is not combined with a chance performance (see FIG. 24). This means that there are times when the low suggestion performance is performed after the chance performance is performed, and times when the low suggestion performance is performed without the chance performance being performed.

On the other hand, each high suggestion effect classified into the high suggestion effect group has the characteristic that it is not combined with a chance effect (see Figure 24). In other words, if a chance effect occurs during the variable display of a certain first special pattern, a high suggestion effect will not be executed within the same variable, and there is a possibility that a high suggestion effect will be executed during the variable display of a first special pattern in which a chance effect does not occur.

In this way, since the low suggestion effect and the high suggestion effect have the characteristics exemplified in FIG. 24, when a chance effect (see FIG. 23(B)) is executed, there are cases where a low suggestion effect is executed and then a win/loss notification effect (win notification effect or miss notification effect) is executed (see FIG. 23(B), (C), (E)), and cases where a win/loss notification effect is executed without executing a low suggestion effect (see FIG. 23(B) and (E)). Also, there are cases where a low suggestion effect is executed without executing a chance effect (see FIG. 23(A) and (C)).

When the chance effect (see FIG. 23(B)) is not executed, a high suggestion effect may be executed (see FIG. 23(A) and (D)).

Such a series of performances is controlled by the sub CPU 91, and when executing a chance performance and a suggestion performance, the sub CPU 91 performs suggestion performance control such that a low suggestion performance is executed without executing a high suggestion performance. is possible.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 23, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, there are cases where the performance proceeds in a first performance pattern in which a low suggestion performance is executed after a chance performance is executed, and cases where the performance proceeds in a second performance pattern in which a low suggestion performance is executed without executing a chance performance, and there is a characteristic that the probability of a winning notification performance being executed is higher when the performance proceeds in the first performance pattern than when the performance proceeds in the second performance pattern (see FIG. 24). That is, when the first low suggestion performance is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 3%, when the second low suggestion performance is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 5%, when the third low suggestion performance is executed alone, the jackpot reliability is about 7%, and when any one of these low suggestion performances is executed after a chance performance, the jackpot reliability is about 27%.

In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability of each low suggestion effect classified into the low suggestion effect group is set to a value lower than the jackpot reliability of each high suggestion effect classified into the high suggestion effect group (see FIG. 24). For this reason, although a high suggestion effect can increase a player's expectations for a jackpot even when executed alone, the same effect cannot be expected for a low suggestion effect, and there is a concern that executing a low suggestion effect may instead lower a player's expectations for the execution of a winning notification effect.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a high suggestion performance is never combined with a chance performance within the same variation, and a low suggestion performance may be combined after the chance performance is executed. ing. In this embodiment, since the jackpot reliability of the chance performance is set to about 25%, if the low suggestion performance is executed after the chance performance, there is a feature that the hit notification performance is likely to be executed afterwards. For this reason, when a low suggestion effect is executed alone, it cannot be expected that a hit notification effect will be executed, but when combined with a chance effect, it is expected that a win notification effect will be executed. It is possible to create a favorable impression on the player regarding the low-suggestion performance.

For this reason, as in this embodiment, by not combining high suggestion effects with chance effects, but instead combining low suggestion effects with chance effects, it is possible to make the player expect that a winning notification effect will be executed, and it is possible to effectively prevent the occurrence of problems such as a significant drop in the player's expectations for a big win due to the execution of a low suggestion effect.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a case where a low suggestion effect is executed after a chance effect is executed, and where the low suggestion effect is not executed, but the order in which the chance effect and the low suggestion effect are executed may be reversed. For example, it is also conceivable to adopt a configuration in which, when a low suggestion effect is executed while a certain first special pattern is being displayed in a varying state, within the same variation, there are times when the chance effect is executed and times when the chance effect is not executed.

So far, we have explained the chance effects and suggestive effects that can be executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, but the processing executed by the sub-CPU 91 to appropriately control the execution of these chance effects and suggestive effects will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 50 and 51.

[About the strange miss notification effect]
Next, the strange feeling miss notification effects executed in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 25 to Fig. 27. Here, Fig. 25 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of strange feeling miss notification effect A. Fig. 26 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of strange feeling miss notification effect B. Fig. 27 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of strange feeling miss notification effect C.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can execute a variable effect including an effect that changes and displays effect symbols in accordance with the changing display of special symbols, and a stop effect that stops and displays effect symbols that indicate the results of the special symbol determination made when the special symbol started to change in accordance with the stopped display of the special symbol. These stop effects include a win notification effect (an example of a first stop effect) that notifies the player that a jackpot game will be played, and a miss notification effect (an example of a second stop effect) that notifies the player that a jackpot game will not be played.

When the game is controlled in a sure-win state (or a time-saving state), if the reserved rights to determine a second special symbol include one that will result in the execution of a "win notification effect," it is possible to execute an icon change effect in which the reserved icon corresponding to the right to determine the second special symbol is displayed in a different display mode from normal.

However, when such an icon change effect is executed, the judgment result will be a "jackpot", or the pending icon corresponding to the right for the second special symbol judgment with a high probability will be compared to other pending icons. There is a concern that as a result, players will be less aware of the variable effects and stop effects that correspond to other pending icons, and as a result, the interest of the variable effects and stop effects will decrease. be done.

In addition, when comparing the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state with the normal gaming state, it is found that in the variable probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state, it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting hole 22, so that the normal game Compared to the state, a special symbol fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected. For this reason, in the variable probability game state and the time-saving game state, there is a problem that the execution time of the variable performance tends to be shorter than in the normal game state, and therefore the performance tends to become monotonous.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to suppress the occurrence of these problems, the three performance symbols indicating a loss are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol is Along with the stop display, a loss notification performance that causes these performance symbols to stop display gives notice that a "win notification performance" will be executed when any of the pending second special symbol determinations is executed. It is said that

The loss notification performance that foretells the execution of this "win notification performance" is different from the normal loss notification performance, and as this makes the player feel uncomfortable, the following explanation is given. Here, the loss notification performance that foretells that the ``win notification performance'' will be executed will be referred to as the ``uncomfortable loss notification performance.'' In this embodiment, three types of discomfort loss notification effects are prepared: discomfort loss notification effects A (see FIG. 25), discomfort loss notification effects B (see FIG. 26), and discomfort loss notification effects C (see FIG. 27). ing.

In addition, in the normal game state, the production symbols are usually composed of numbers and characters, whereas in the variable probability game state or the time-saving game state, the production symbols do not have characters and are composed of only numbers. The following explanation will be given by taking as an example the case where the

(Uncomfortable feeling notification performance A)
25 illustrates an example of how the strange miss notification effect A is executed when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state (or the time-saving game state). When the strange miss notification effect A is executed, the effect proceeds as follows.

FIG. 25A shows an example of a state in which three production symbols indicating a winning number of "126" are stopped on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "lose". There is. In this way, the second special symbol indicating a "lose" is stopped and displayed, and a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three production symbols indicating the winning number of "126" have stopped. When the elapsed time has elapsed, the second special symbol determination that has been suspended is executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol and production symbol is started (see FIG. 25(B)). FIG. 25(B) shows an example in which the left symbol column, the middle symbol column, and the right symbol column are all scrolled downward.

Here, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination performed at the start of the symbol variation illustrated in FIG. The three production symbols showing the winning number of "835" come to a pseudo-stop, and immediately after that, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and these production symbols come to a real stop (Fig. 25 ( See C). This is a normal loss notification performance that is performed in the variable probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

Here, at the time when the miss notification effect of FIG. 25(C) is being executed, for example, three rights, Special Chart 2 First Reserve, Special Chart 2 Second Reserve, and Special Chart 2 Third Reserve, are reserved as the right to judge the second special pattern, and if advance judgment information is obtained indicating that the judgment results of Special Chart 2 First Reserve and Special Chart 2 Second Reserve are "miss" and the judgment result of Special Chart 2 Third Reserve is "guaranteed jackpot", then the pattern change corresponding to Special Chart 2 First Reserve and the pattern change corresponding to Special Chart 2 Second Reserve are used to execute the strange miss notification effect A in the following manner.

That is, when a predetermined confirmation time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three performance symbols showing the "835" scatter pattern stopped in association with the stopping display of the second special symbol indicating a "miss", a second special symbol determination corresponding to the first reserved special symbol 2 is executed, and the display of the changing performance symbols associated with the changing display of the second special symbol starts (see FIG. 25(D)). The display of the changing performance symbols here starts in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold of special symbol 2 ends, for example, the 4 symbols on the left, the middle character symbol, and the 9 symbols on the right will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the As the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the first discomfort-feeling loss notification performance A is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 25(E)). Here, the 4 symbols on the left are numerical symbols composed of the number "4", the 9 symbols on the right are numerical symbols composed of the number "9", and only the middle character symbol is a numerical symbol composed of the number "4". It is a character design made up of characters.

In the normal loss notification performance, the three performance symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are all numerical symbols, whereas in the discomfort loss notification performance A, any one of the three performance symbols A character pattern is displayed instead of a number pattern as one effect pattern (medium pattern in the example shown in FIG. 25(E)). In this way, by executing the discomfort loss notification performance A in which the three performance symbols including the character symbol are pseudo-stopped and then stopped for real, the effect is to make the player feel uncomfortable and to focus on the variable performance and the stop performance. can be expected.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first hold of the special symbol 2, and the three production symbols illustrated in FIG. .5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 second suspension is executed, and the fluctuating display of the production symbol along with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol starts (Fig. 25(F) reference). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second reserved symbol 2 ends, for example, the left character symbol, the middle 6 symbol, and the right 1 symbol all pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately afterwards, a losing symbol is displayed as the second special symbol, and a second strange feeling losing notification effect A is executed in which these three effect symbols stop as they are (see FIG. 25(G)). Here, the middle 6 symbol is a number symbol consisting of the number "6," the right 1 symbol is a number symbol consisting of the number "1," and only the left character symbol is a character symbol consisting of a specific character rather than a number.

In this second strange feeling miss notification performance A (see FIG. 25(G)), three performance patterns including a character pattern are displayed, just like in the first strange feeling miss notification performance A (see FIG. 25(E)), so you can expect the same effect as in the first strange feeling miss notification performance A.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 second hold, and the three performance symbols illustrated in FIG. .5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 third hold is executed, and the fluctuating display of the production symbol along with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol starts (Fig. 25 (H) reference). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Here, since the judgment result of the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special pattern 2 third reservation is "probable variable jackpot", immediately before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 third reservation ends. Then, for example, the three production symbols showing the double number "777" will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the jackpot symbol (probable variable symbol) will be stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, and these three A winning notification performance is executed in which the performance symbols stop as they are (see FIG. 25(I)).

In the example shown in FIG. 25, the stopping positions of the character symbols are different between the first discomfort loss notification performance A and the second discomfort loss notification performance A, but for example, only the middle design is the character design. The display position of the character design may be fixed, such as displayed as . Also, for example, in the first discomfort loss notification performance A, three performance symbols including one character symbol are displayed, and in the second discomfort loss notification performance A, three performance symbols including two character symbols are displayed. Thus, the number of character symbols may be increased each time the discomfort failure notification effect A is executed.

So far, with reference to Figure 25, an example has been described in which the strange feeling miss notification performance A is executed twice, but the number of times the strange feeling miss notification performance A is executed is variable, and it is also possible to execute the strange feeling miss notification performance A once or three times using the pattern change that occurs before the pattern change that executes the winning notification performance (here, the change corresponding to the third reserved special chart 2). When the strange feeling miss notification performance A is executed only once, for example, a configuration can be considered in which the normal miss notification performance is executed in the scene in which the performance in Figure 25 (E) is executed, and only the strange feeling miss notification performance A in Figure 25 (G) is executed.

In this way, by executing one or more strange miss notification effects A to warn that the reserved second special pattern determination rights include one that will be determined to be a "jackpot," it is possible to make the player feel a strange sensation while drawing his or her attention to the variable and stop effects, thereby effectively increasing the player's anticipation of a jackpot.

(Uncomfortable feeling notification performance B)
26 illustrates an example of how the strange miss notification effect B is executed when the game is controlled in the probability game state (or time-saving game state). When the strange miss notification effect B is executed, the effect proceeds as follows.

Figure 26 (A) shows an example of the state immediately after the display of the effect patterns (scrolling display of three pattern rows) begins as the display of the second special pattern begins to change. Here, if the result of the second special pattern determination made at the start of the pattern change shown in Figure 26 (A) is "miss," three effect patterns showing, for example, a "152" scatter pattern will be pseudo-stopped just before the display of the second special pattern ends, and immediately after that, as a missing pattern is displayed as the second special pattern, a normal miss notification effect is executed in which these effect patterns are stopped as they are (see Figure 26 (B)).

Here, at a point in time when the loss notification effect shown in FIG. 26(B) is being executed, for example, the two rights of special pattern 2 first reservation and special pattern 2 second reservation are available as the right to judge the second special symbol. If it is on hold and preliminary judgment information is obtained indicating that the judgment result of the special drawing 2 first holding is a “loss” and the judgment result of the special drawing 2 second holding is a “normal jackpot”, Using the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 first reservation, the discomfort loss notification performance B is executed in the following flow.

In other words, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three production symbols indicating a random number of "152" stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "loss". , the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first suspension of the special symbol 2 is executed, and the variable display of the performance symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (see FIG. 26(C)). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the first reserved symbol of the special symbol 2 ends, for example, the left 9 symbol, the middle 7 symbol, and the right 6 symbol all pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, a losing symbol is displayed as the second special symbol, and these three performance symbols stop as they are, and a strange feeling of loss notification performance B is executed (see FIG. 26 (D)). Here, the left 9 symbol is a number symbol consisting of the number "9", the middle 7 symbol is a number symbol consisting of the number "7", and the right 6 symbol is a number symbol consisting of the number "9". In this way, all of these three performance symbols are number symbols, but the middle 7 symbol is a pseudo consecutive symbol that notifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance, as described above based on FIG. 9. As shown in Figures 9(D)-(E) and 9(G)-(H), when the middle 7 symbol is pseudo-stopped, a pseudo consecutive effect occurs and the scrolling display of the three symbol rows resumes, so essentially the middle 7 symbol does not actually stop.

In contrast, the strange miss notification effect B is configured as a miss notification effect in which three performance symbols, including the middle 7 symbol, which basically never stops, are pseudo-stopped and then stopped for real, so that the player feels strange that the middle 7 symbol, which should never stop, has actually stopped, and it is possible to have the player focus on the variable and stop effects.

When a losing symbol is displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first reserved special symbol 2, and a predetermined confirmation time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three performance symbols exemplified in FIG. 26(D) have stopped, a second special symbol determination corresponding to the second reserved special symbol 2 is executed, and the display of the changing performance symbols associated with the changing display of the second special symbol begins (see FIG. 26(E)). The display of the changing performance symbols here begins in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the fluctuating display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second hold of the special symbol 2 ends, for example, the three production symbols showing the double number of "444" will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, Then, as the jackpot symbol (normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, a hit notification performance is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 26(F)).

In addition, here, we have explained the case where the strange feeling loss notification effect B is executed only once and then the winning notification effect is executed, but it is also possible to execute the strange feeling loss notification effect B multiple times (for example, twice or three times). It is also possible to execute the winning notification effect after doing so.

In this way, by executing one or more strange miss notification effects B that warn that the reserved second special pattern determination rights include one that will be determined to be a "jackpot," it is possible to make the player feel strange while drawing his or her attention to the variable and stop effects, thereby effectively increasing the player's anticipation of a jackpot.

(Uncomfortable feeling notification performance C)
27 shows an example of how the strange miss notification effect C is executed when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state (or the time-saving game state). When the strange miss notification effect C is executed, the effect proceeds as follows.

FIG. 27(A) shows an example of a state in which three production symbols indicating a winning number of "462" are stopped on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "loss". There is. Here, at a point in time when the loss notification effect shown in FIG. Four rights are reserved: 3 reservation, special drawing 2 4th reservation, and the judgment result of the 3 reservations from special drawing 2 1st reservation to special drawing 2 3rd reservation is "lost", and the special drawing 2 right is reserved. If preliminary judgment information indicating that the judgment result of 4 hold is a "probable jackpot" is obtained, the symbol fluctuation corresponding to the special pattern 2 first hold and the pattern change corresponding to the special pattern 2 second hold. Using this and the symbol variation corresponding to the special figure 2 third hold, the sense of incongruity loss notification performance C is executed in the following flow.

That is, when a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three production symbols indicating a random number of "462" stopped with the stop display of the second special symbol indicating a "loss". , the second special symbol determination corresponding to the first suspension of the special symbol 2 is executed, and the variable display of the performance symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is started (see FIG. 27(B)). The variable display of the effect symbols here is started in the same manner as described above based on FIG. 25(B).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special pattern corresponding to the first reserved special pattern 2 ends, for example, the left 1 pattern, the middle 3 pattern, and the right 9 pattern will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, a losing pattern will be displayed as the second special pattern, and the first strange missing notification display C will be executed in which these three display patterns will stop as they are (see Figure 27 (C)).

Here, the left 1, middle 3, and right 9 are all number symbols, but as is clear from a comparison of Figs. 27(A) and (C), in a normal miss notification effect, the three effect symbols are displayed in a straight line on the winning line, whereas in the strange miss notification effect C, at least one of the three effect symbols is displayed in a position different from the winning line (see Fig. 27(C)). Fig. 27(C) shows an example in which only the right 9 is displayed on the winning line, and the left 1 and middle 3 are displayed in a position different from the winning line (here, below the winning line).

In this way, in the strange miss notification effect C, at least one of the three effect patterns is displayed stopped at a position other than on the winning line, making the player feel strange and drawing their attention to the changing and stopping effects.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the first reservation of special symbol 2, and the three production symbols illustrated in FIG. .5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 second suspension is executed, and the fluctuating display of the performance symbol accompanying the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is started (FIG. 27(D) reference).

Next, just before the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second reserved special symbol 2 ends, for example, the left 5 symbol, the middle 5 symbol, and the right 4 symbol all pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, a losing symbol is displayed as the second special symbol, and a second strange feeling losing notification effect C is executed in which these three performance symbols stop as they are (see FIG. 27(E)). In the second strange feeling losing notification effect C, like the first strange feeling losing notification effect C, the stopped display positions of the left and right symbols are shifted from the active line, making it possible for the player to feel strange.

When a losing pattern is displayed as the second special pattern corresponding to the second reserved special pattern 2, and a predetermined confirmation time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the three performance patterns exemplified in FIG. 27(E) have stopped, a determination of the second special pattern corresponding to the third reserved special pattern 2 is executed, and the display of the changing performance patterns associated with the changing display of the second special pattern begins (see FIG. 27(F)).

Next, just before the variable display of the 2nd special symbol corresponding to the 3rd hold of the special symbol 2 ends, for example, the 6 symbols on the left, the 6 symbols in the middle, and the 6 symbols on the right will pseudo-stop at the same time, and immediately after that, the As the loss symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol, the third discomfort-feeling loss notification performance C is executed in which these three performance symbols are stopped as they are (see FIG. 27(G)). In the third discomfort loss notification performance C, similar to the first discomfort loss notification performance C and the second discomfort loss notification performance C, the stop display positions of the left and right symbols are shifted from the effective line, and the game It is possible to make people feel uncomfortable. In addition, in the third discomfort loss notification performance C, three performance symbols indicating the same number (here "6") are displayed in a staggered manner (without being lined up in a straight line). It is possible to increase it.

The losing symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol corresponding to the special symbol 2 third hold, and the three production symbols illustrated in FIG. 5 seconds), the second special symbol judgment corresponding to the special symbol 2 fourth hold is executed, and the fluctuating display of the production symbol along with the fluctuating display of the second special symbol is started (Fig. 27 (H) reference).

Here, since the result of the determination of the second special pattern corresponding to the fourth reserved special pattern 2 is a "guaranteed jackpot," just before the variable display of the second special pattern corresponding to the fourth reserved special pattern 2 ends, for example, three performance patterns showing the repeated numbers "777" are pseudo-stopped simultaneously, and immediately after that, a jackpot pattern (guaranteed jackpot pattern) is displayed as the second special pattern, and a winning notification effect is executed in which these three performance patterns stop as they are (see FIG. 27 (I)).

In the example shown in FIG. 27, the direction of deviation of the performance symbols is the same in the three discomfort failure notification performances C, but the direction of displacement of the performance symbols may be made to be different from each other. Another way to shift the performance symbols is, for example, to stop and display the left and middle symbols on the effective line, and to display only the right symbol at a position shifted from the effective line.

In addition, the first discomfort loss notification performance C (see Figure 27 (C)), the second discomfort loss notification performance C (see Figure 27 (E)), and the third discomfort loss notification performance C (see Figure 27 ( In G) and , the combinations of numbers represented by the three effect symbols are different from each other, but these combinations of numbers may be made common.

In addition, FIG. 27(G) shows an example of the final third and final strangeness miss notification effect C in which three even numbers corresponding to a normal jackpot of "666" are displayed, but in the case of the three performance symbols showing the double number "777" which indicates a sure chance jackpot as in FIG. 27(I), the three performance symbols showing the double number "777" may also be displayed shifted in position in the third strangeness miss notification effect C.

Up to this point, an example has been described with reference to FIG. 27, taking as an example a case in which the discomfort loss notification effect C is executed three times, but the number of times the discomfort loss notification effect C is executed is variable, and the winning notification effect is executed. It is also possible to perform the discomfort loss notification performance B once or twice using the symbol variation performed before the symbol variation (here, the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 fourth reservation).

In this way, one or more discomfort loss notification performances C are performed to foretell that the pending second special symbol determination rights include what will be determined as a "jackpot". By doing so, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for a jackpot by focusing on the fluctuating performance and the stop performance while making the player feel uncomfortable.

Hereinafter, the RAM configuration of each control board for realizing the game control and performance control described based on the drawings up to FIG. 27, and the processing performed by each control board will be described.

[Example of configuration of main RAM 83]
FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram for explaining storage areas of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area. As illustrated in FIG. 28(A), the main RAM 83 includes a judgment storage area 830, a special memory area 830 as a storage area for storing acquired information etc. acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21. FIG. 1: A first reservation storage area 831, a special figure 1 and second reservation storage area 832, a special figure 1 and third reservation storage area 833, and a special figure 1 and fourth reservation storage area 834 are provided. In addition, the main RAM 83 has the above-mentioned judgment storage area 830, special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 as a storage area for storing acquired information etc. acquired when a game ball wins in the second starting port 22. , a special figure 2/second reservation storage area 836, a special figure 2/third reservation storage area 837, and a special figure 2/fourth reservation storage area 838 are provided.

The determination storage area 830 is a storage area in which various information used for special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834 are storage areas in which various information related to the first special symbol determination are stored, and the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 is a storage area in which various information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. When both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are pending, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the determination storage area 830, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, when executing the reserved special symbol determination, if the second special symbol determination is suspended, the information is stored in the special symbol 2/first reservation storage area 835. Various information is shifted, and when only the first special symbol determination is pending, various information stored in the special symbol 1/first pending storage area 831 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 28(B), the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 are areas for storing information for reserving the right to judge special symbols, and each of the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 is an area for storing information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol, and each of the reservation storage areas 831 to 838 is an area for storing information for reserving the right to judge a special symbol. It includes an area for storing , an area for storing symbol random numbers, an area for storing reach random numbers, an area for storing fluctuating pattern random numbers, an area for storing preliminary determination information which is information indicating the preliminary determination results, etc.

Here, the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are as described above. The preliminary determination information is information obtained by the special 2 preliminary determination process (see FIG. 31) or the special 1 preliminary determination process (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, based on the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number. be. The advance determination information is as described above based on FIG. Stored within the area.

In the gaming machine 1, each time a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 21, the five pieces of information described based on FIG. 28(B) are stored in one of the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the special chart 1/fourth reserved memory area 834, starting from the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831. Also, each time a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 22, the above five pieces of information are stored in one of the special chart 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the special chart 2/fourth reserved memory area 838, starting from the special chart 2/first reserved memory area 835.

For example, when information is stored in the determination memory area 830 and no information is stored in any of the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the special chart 1/fourth reserved memory area 834, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, five pieces of information related to the first special pattern determination newly acquired in response to the winning are stored in the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831. Also, for example, when five pieces of information are stored in each of the determination memory area 830, the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831, and the special chart 1/second reserved memory area 832, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21, five pieces of information related to the first special pattern determination newly acquired in response to the winning are stored in the special chart 1/third reserved memory area 833.

In addition, when the information stored in the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831 is shifted to the judgment memory area 830 when the first special pattern judgment is executed, the information stored in the reserved memory area related to the first special pattern judgment from the special chart 1/second reserved memory area 832 onwards is shifted to the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831 side. For example, when information is stored in each of the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the special chart 1/third reserved memory area 833, and the information stored in the special chart 1/second reserved memory area 832 is shifted to the judgment memory area 830, the information stored in the special chart 1/second reserved memory area 832 is shifted to the special chart 1/first reserved memory area 831, and the information stored in the special chart 1/third reserved memory area 833 is shifted to the special chart 1/second reserved memory area 832.

Such information shift processing is similarly performed in the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 where information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are pending, that is, the special symbol 1/first pending storage area 831 and the special symbol 2/first pending storage area If information is stored in both of the storage areas 835, prior to the shift process targeting the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the special figure 1/4th reservation storage area 834, the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 834 is stored. Shift processing targeting the 1st reservation storage area 835 to the special figure 2/4th reservation storage area 838 is performed with priority.

By the way, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 or the second starting hole 22 and various random numbers are obtained during the special symbol fluctuation display or jackpot game, the special symbol judgment and special symbol fluctuation display cannot be performed. It cannot be done immediately. For this reason, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 81 stores the acquired various random numbers etc. in the reservation storage area 831 as information that reserves the right to judge special symbols, as described above. -838. On the other hand, if the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not pending, and the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 81 generates various random numbers etc. obtained in response to the start-up win. It is directly stored in the determination storage area 830.

[Interrupt processing by main control board 80]
Next, interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating the interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80. The main control board 80 repeatedly executes the series of processes illustrated in FIG. 29 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation, excluding special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the main control board 80 described based on the flowcharts from FIG. 29 onwards is performed according to instructions issued by the main CPU 81 based on a program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process to update various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, a fluctuation pattern random number, and a normal symbol random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, the symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation pattern random number, and the normal symbol random number are incremented by "1" each time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for processing step S1, and after each random number reaches a preset maximum value, it is returned to "0" and updated.

Following the processing of step S1, the main CPU 81 executes a sensor detection process (step S2) that includes a process of acquiring various random numbers in response to the input of detection signals from the first start hole sensor 211, the second start hole sensor 221, and the gate sensor 251. This sensor detection process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 30.

Following the process of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes special symbol determination, causes the first special symbol display 41 or second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays the result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying a special symbol indicating , etc. is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 33.

Following the processing of step S3, the main CPU 81 executes normal pattern determination, executes normal pattern processing including processing for causing the normal pattern display 43 to variably display the normal pattern and then causing the normal pattern indicating the result of the normal pattern determination to be statically displayed (step S4).

Following the processing in step S4, the main CPU 81 controls the second starting port solenoid 222 that operates the opening/closing member 23 when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened as a result of normal symbol determination. A second starting port opening/closing control process for opening and closing the second starting port 22 is executed (step S5).

Following the processing of step S5, if the main CPU 81 determines that a "jackpot" has occurred in the jackpot determination processing executed in the special symbol processing of step S3, it executes a jackpot opening/closing control processing that controls the first jackpot opening solenoid 262 (or the second jackpot opening solenoid 282) to open or close the first jackpot opening 26 (or the second jackpot opening 28) (step S6). This jackpot opening/closing control processing will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 37 to 39.

Following the processing of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes prize ball processing that controls the payout of prize balls in response to winning game balls (step S7).

Following the processing of step S7, the main CPU 81 executes a transmission process to transmit to the sub-control board 90 various commands that were set (stored) in the main RAM 83 in the processing steps prior to step S7, as well as information necessary for determining the content of the performance (step S8).

[Sensor detection processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 30 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 30, following the random number update process in step S1, the main CPU 81 determines whether the gate sensor 251 allows the game ball to pass through the gate 25 based on whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate sensor 251. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step S201). Here, if it is determined that the gate sensor 251 has detected the passing of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: YES), the pending number F of normal symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is set to the preset normal It is determined whether the maximum number of reservations for symbol determination is less than Fmax ("4" in this embodiment) (step S202).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number F is less than "4" (step S202: YES), it updates the reserved number F to a value incremented by "1" (step S203), and obtains the value of the normal pattern random number, which is updated each time the random number update process of step S1 is performed, at the time when the passing of the game ball through the gate 25 is detected, and stores this value in a specified area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S204 and determines that the gate sensor 251 has not detected the passing of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: NO), the number of reservations F is less than "4". If it is determined that it is not (step S202: NO), the second starting port sensor 221 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 221. It is determined whether or not (step S206). Here, if it is determined that the second starting port sensor 221 has detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 (step S206: YES), the number of pending second special symbol determinations stored in the main RAM 83 T2 It is determined whether or not is less than the preset maximum pending number T2max (“4” in this embodiment) of the second special symbol determination (step S207).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number of reservations T2 is less than "4" (step S207: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number of reservations T2 to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S208), and the random number update process of step S1 is performed. Regarding the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variable pattern random number that are updated every time the game is played, the values of the timing at which winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 22 is detected are respectively obtained (step S209).

In this way, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are obtained in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 22 is detected while the reserved number T2 is less than the maximum reserved number T2max. Note that when various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored directly in the determination memory area 830, and when various random numbers are obtained in a situation where they cannot be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored in one of the areas of the special symbol 2/first reserved memory area 835 to the special symbol 2/fourth reserved memory area 838.

Following the process of step S209, the main CPU 81 executes a preliminary determination process (special 2 preliminary determination process) regarding suspension of the second special symbol determination (step S210). In addition, if a game ball enters the second starting port 22 when the number of pending special symbols T2 in the second special symbol determination is "0" and the game ball is not in the middle of a jackpot game or while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, The obtained various random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the second special symbol determination is not suspended, the special 2 preliminary determination process related to the second special symbol determination is not performed. Such special 2 preliminary determination processing will be described in detail later based on FIG. 31.

Following the processing of step S210, the main CPU 81 sets a hold command for the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This hold command is a command notifying that the second special symbol determination has been put on hold, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. Note that if the processing of step S212 is performed without the processing of special 2 advance determination in step S210 being performed, a hold command that does not include advance determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the processing of step S212 is performed after the processing of special 2 advance determination in step S210, a hold command including advance determination information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the processing of this step S210 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212 and determines that the second starting port sensor 221 has not detected the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 22 (step S206: NO), the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S212. When it is determined that the pending number T2 of the special symbol determination is not less than "4" (step S207: NO), the first starting port sensor 211 is activated based on the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211. It is determined whether or not winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 is detected (step S214). Here, if it is determined that the first starting port sensor 211 has detected the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 21 (step S214: YES), the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is less than the preset maximum pending number T1max (“4” in this embodiment) of the first special symbol determination (step S215).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number T1 is less than "4" (step S215: YES), it updates the reserved number T1 to a value incremented by "1" (step S216), and obtains the values of the timing at which the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 21 was detected for the jackpot random number, pattern random number, reach random number, and fluctuation pattern random number, which are updated each time the random number update process of step S1 is performed (step S217).

In this way, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination are obtained in response to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 21 is detected while the reserved number T1 is less than the maximum reserved number T1max. Note that when various random numbers are obtained in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol can be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored directly in the determination memory area 830, and when various random numbers are obtained in a situation where they cannot be performed immediately, these random numbers are stored in any of the areas of the special symbol 1/first reserved memory area 831 to the special symbol 1/fourth reserved memory area 834.

Following the processing of step S217, the main CPU 81 executes a special 1 advance judgment process related to the reservation of the first special symbol judgment (step S218). Note that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 21 while neither a jackpot game nor a variable display of special symbols is in progress and the reservation number T1 of the first special symbol judgment is "0", various random numbers acquired in response to the winning are directly stored in the judgment memory area 830, and the first special symbol judgment based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the first special symbol judgment is not reserved, the special 1 advance judgment process related to the first special symbol judgment is not executed. Such a special 1 advance judgment process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S218, it sets a hold command for the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This hold command is a command to notify that the first special symbol determination has been put on hold, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process of step S8. Note that, if the process of step S220 is performed without performing the special 1 pre-determination process of step S218, a hold command that does not include pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, if the process of step S220 is performed after the special 1 pre-determination process of step S218, a hold command including the pre-determination information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the process of step S218.

[Special 2 preliminary determination processing by main control board 80]
Hereinafter, the Special 2 preliminary determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. Here, FIG. 31 is a detailed flowchart of the special 2 preliminary determination process in step S210 of FIG.

30, the main CPU 81 stores the winning start port information (here, information indicating the second start port 22) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2100). Next, based on the information indicating the game state stored in the main RAM 83, it determines whether the current state is a high probability state (step S2101). If it is determined that the current state is a high probability state (step S2101: YES), that is, if the current game state is a "probability game state", it reads out the high probability/special 2 advance judgment jackpot random number table from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2102). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state (step S2101: NO), that is, if the current gaming state is a "normal gaming state" or a "time-saving gaming state," the jackpot random number table for low probability/special 2 advance judgment is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2103).

In the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 2 advance judgment, as described above based on the "high probability state" column in FIG. 19(A), random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "guaranteed win random numbers", random numbers from "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional win random numbers", and random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "guaranteed loss random numbers". On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table for low probability/special 2 advance judgment, as described above based on the "low probability state" column in FIG. 19(A), random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "guaranteed win random numbers", random numbers from "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional loss random numbers", and random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "guaranteed loss random numbers".

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S2102 or the process of step S2103, the main CPU 81 executes a jackpot random number type specification process (step S2104). This jackpot random number type specification process is a process for specifying the type of jackpot random number obtained by the process of step S209 in FIG. 30.

When the main CPU 81 sets the high probability/special 2 advance judgment jackpot random number table by the processing of step S2102, it identifies the type of the acquired jackpot random number based on which random number the acquired jackpot random number matches with, among the "guaranteed win random number," "provisional win random number," and "guaranteed miss random number" defined by the high probability/special 2 advance judgment jackpot random number table. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), in the high probability/special 2 advance judgment jackpot random number table, as described above, random number values from "0" to "3" are stored as "guaranteed win random number," random number values from "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional win random number," and random number values from "14" to "839" are stored as "guaranteed miss random number." The main CPU 81 compares the acquired jackpot random number with the random number value in the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 2 advance determination, and identifies the type of jackpot by reading the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matching random number value from the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 2 advance determination. For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "3", the type of jackpot random number is identified as a "guaranteed win random number". Also, for example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "215", the type of jackpot random number is identified as a "guaranteed lose random number".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 sets the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination by the process of step S2103, the acquired jackpot random number is specified by the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination. The type of the obtained jackpot random number is specified based on which of the "confirmed hit random number", "temporary loss random number", and "confirmed loss random number" it matches. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "confirmed hit random numbers", and "4" The random numbers from "13" to "13" are stored as "tentative loss random numbers", and the random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "confirmed loss random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with the random number in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination, and uses the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matched random number as the low probability/Special 2 preliminary determination. The type of jackpot is identified by reading it from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "5", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "temporary loss random number". Further, for example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "835", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "determined loss random number".

Following the processing of step S2104, the main CPU 81 stores the jackpot pre-judgment information in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2105). As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), if the jackpot random number type identified by the processing of step S2104 is a "winning random number", "winning confirmation information" indicating that the jackpot will be a "jackpot" in both the low probability state and the high probability state is stored as the jackpot pre-judgment information. Also, if the jackpot random number type identified by the processing of step S2104 is a "missing confirmation random number", "missing confirmation information" indicating that the jackpot will be a "miss" in both the low probability state and the high probability state is stored as the jackpot pre-judgment information. Also, if the jackpot random number type identified by the processing of step S2104 is a "provisional missing random number", "provisional missing information" indicating that the jackpot will be a "miss" if it is reserved and consumed while remaining in the low probability state, but will be a "jackpot" if it is reserved and consumed after transitioning to the high probability state is stored as the jackpot pre-judgment information. In addition, if the type of jackpot random number identified by the processing of step S2104 is a "provisional win random number," if the reserved number is consumed while remaining in a high probability state, it will be a "jackpot," but if the reserved number is consumed after moving to a low probability state, it will be a "miss," and "provisional win information" indicating this is stored as jackpot advance judgment information.

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2105 is "loss confirmation information" (step S2106). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not "confirmed loss information" (step S2106: NO), that is, the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is "confirmed win information", "provisional loss information", or If it is "temporary win information", it is certain that it will be a jackpot, or there is a possibility that it will be a jackpot, so the following process is performed to specify the type of jackpot.

In other words, if the main CPU 81 determines that the stored jackpot advance judgment information is not "definite miss information" (step S2106: NO), it reads out the second start port winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(C)) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2107), and executes the jackpot type identification process (step S2108).

In the second starting opening winning symbol determination table (see Figure 6(C)), 80 random numbers are associated with "10R probability variation" and 10 random numbers are associated with "3R probability variation". 10 random numbers are associated with "3R normal". On the other hand, in step S2108, the main CPU 81 selects the jackpot type (jackpot type) corresponding to the random number value that matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot random number type identification process in step S2104. The type of jackpot to be selected when it is determined to be a jackpot is specified by reading from the 2-start opening winning symbol determination table. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 6(C), the jackpot type specified by the process of step S2108 is "10R probability variation", "3R probability variation", or "3R normal".

Next, the main CPU 81 stores information indicating the jackpot type identified by the process of step S2108 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 as jackpot type preliminary determination information (step S2109).

Then, the main CPU 81 judges whether the jackpot pre-judgment information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the processing of step S2105 is "provisional loss information" (step S2110). Here, if it is judged that the stored jackpot pre-judgment information is not "provisional loss information" (step S2110: NO), that is, if the stored jackpot pre-judgment information is "confirmed win information" or "provisional win information", it judges whether the current state is a high base state, for example, based on the information indicating the game state stored in the main RAM 83 (step S2111).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is a high base state (step S2111: YES), i.e., when the game is in a guaranteed bonus game state or a time-limited game state, it reads out from the main ROM 82 the variation pattern selection table for the special 2 big win in the high base state and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2112). Conversely, when the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is not a high base state (step S2111: NO), i.e., when the game is in a normal game state, it reads out from the main ROM 82 the variation pattern selection table for the special 2 big win in the low base state and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2113).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2105 is "loss confirmation information" (step S2106: YES), or the stored jackpot preliminary determination information If it is determined that is "temporary loss information" (step S2110: YES), it is determined whether the current state is a high base state (step S2114), similarly to the process of step S2111.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2114: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the special 2 loss variation pattern selection table in the high base state from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2115). ). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2114: NO), the variation pattern selection table for special 2 loss in the low base state is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2116). .

When the main CPU 81 sets the fluctuation pattern selection table by the process of step S2112, the process of step S2113, the process of step S2115, or the process of step S2116, it executes the special 2 fluctuation pattern identification process (step S2117). Specifically, it identifies the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol by reading from the fluctuation pattern selection table in which the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2104 is set. Then, it stores the special 2 fluctuation pattern information indicating the identified fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in a specified area of the main RAM 83 (step S2118), and stores the game status information indicating the current game status in a specified area of the main RAM 83 (step S2119).

By executing the series of processes shown in FIG. 31, the various pre-determination information described above based on FIG. 19 (B) is stored in a specified area of the main RAM 83, and this pre-determination information is included in the reserved command related to the reserved right to determine the second special pattern and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Special 1 Preliminary Determination Process by Main Control Board 80]
The special 1 advance determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a detailed flowchart of the special 1 advance determination process in step S218 of Fig. 30.

Following the process of step S217 in FIG. 30, the main CPU 81 stores winning starting opening information (here, information indicating the first starting opening 21) in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2180). Subsequently, similarly to the process of step S2101 in FIG. 31, it is determined whether the current state is a high probability state (step S2181). Here, if it is determined that the current state is a high probability state (step S2181: YES), that is, if the current gaming state is a "probability variable gaming state", the jackpot random number for high probability / special 1 preliminary determination The table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2182). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current state is not a high probability state (step S2181: NO), that is, if the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time-saving gaming state", the low probability state/Special 1 The preliminary determination jackpot random number table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2183).

In the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 1 advance judgment, as described above based on the "high probability state" column in FIG. 19(A), random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "guaranteed win random numbers", random numbers from "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional win random numbers", and random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "guaranteed loss random numbers". On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table for low probability/special 1 advance judgment, as described above based on the "low probability state" column in FIG. 19(A), random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "guaranteed win random numbers", random numbers from "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional loss random numbers", and random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "guaranteed loss random numbers".

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S2182 or when the process of step S2183 is executed, the main CPU 81 executes the jackpot random number type identification process (step S2184). This jackpot random number type specifying process is a process for specifying the type of jackpot random number acquired by the process of step S217 in FIG. 30.

When the main CPU 81 sets the high probability/special 1 advance judgment jackpot random number table by the processing of step S2182, it identifies the type of the acquired jackpot random number based on which random number the acquired jackpot random number matches with among the "guaranteed win random number," "provisional win random number," and "guaranteed miss random number" defined by the high probability/special 1 advance judgment jackpot random number table. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), in the high probability/special 1 advance judgment jackpot random number table, as described above, random number values from "0" to "3" are stored as "guaranteed win random number," random number values from "4" to "13" are stored as "provisional win random number," and random number values from "14" to "839" are stored as "guaranteed miss random number." The main CPU 81 compares the acquired jackpot random number with the random number value in the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 1 advance judgment, and identifies the type of jackpot by reading the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matching random number value from the jackpot random number table for high probability/special 1 advance judgment. For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "1", the type of jackpot random number is identified as a "guaranteed win random number". Also, for example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "11", the type of jackpot random number is identified as a "provisional win random number".

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 sets the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination by the process of step S2183, the acquired jackpot random number is specified by the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination. The type of the obtained jackpot random number is specified based on which of the "confirmed hit random number", "temporary loss random number", and "confirmed loss random number" it matches. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination, random numbers from "0" to "3" are stored as "confirmed winning random numbers", and "4" The random numbers from "13" to "13" are stored as "tentative loss random numbers", and the random numbers from "14" to "839" are stored as "confirmed loss random numbers". The main CPU 81 compares the obtained jackpot random number with random numbers in the jackpot random number table for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination, and uses the jackpot random number type information corresponding to the matched random number for low probability/Special 1 preliminary determination. The type of jackpot is identified by reading it from the jackpot random number table. For example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "12", the type of jackpot random number is specified as a "temporary loss random number". Further, for example, if the acquired jackpot random number is "96", the type of the jackpot random number is specified as a "determined loss random number".

Following the processing of step S2184, the main CPU 81 stores the jackpot pre-judgment information in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2185). As is clear from the notation in FIG. 19(A), if the jackpot random number type specified by the processing of step S2184 is a "definite win random number", "definite win information" indicating that the jackpot will be a "jackpot" in both the low probability state and the high probability state is stored as the jackpot pre-judgment information. Also, if the jackpot random number type specified by the processing of step S2184 is a "definite miss random number", "definite miss information" indicating that the jackpot will be a "miss" in both the low probability state and the high probability state is stored as the jackpot pre-judgment information. Also, if the jackpot random number type specified by the processing of step S2184 is a "provisional miss random number", "provisional miss information" indicating that the jackpot will be a "miss" if the jackpot is reserved and consumed while remaining in the low probability state, but will be a "jackpot" if the jackpot is reserved and consumed after transitioning to the high probability state is stored as the jackpot pre-judgment information. In addition, if the type of jackpot random number identified by the processing of step S2184 is a "provisional win random number," if the reserved number is consumed while remaining in a high probability state, it will be a "jackpot," but if the reserved number is consumed after moving to a low probability state, it will be a "miss," and "provisional win information" indicating this is stored as jackpot advance judgment information.

Subsequently, the main CPU 81 determines whether the jackpot preliminary determination information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 through the process of step S2185 is "loss confirmation information" (step S2186). Here, if it is determined that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not "confirmed loss information" (step S2186: NO), that is, the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is "confirmed win information", "provisional loss information", or If it is "temporary win information", it is certain that it will be a jackpot, or there is a possibility that it will be a jackpot, so the following process is performed to specify the type of jackpot.

That is, if the main CPU 81 determines that the stored jackpot preliminary determination information is not "loss confirmation information" (step S2186: NO), the main CPU 81 uses the first starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(B)) as the main CPU. It is read from the ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2187), and jackpot type identification processing is executed (step S2188).

In the first starting port winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(B)), 50 random number values are associated with "5R sure chance", and 50 random number values are associated with "5R normal". In response to this, in step S2188, the main CPU 81 reads out from the first starting port winning symbol determination table the jackpot type (type of jackpot) that corresponds to the random number value that matches the pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot random number type determination process of step S2184, thereby determining the type of jackpot to be selected when a jackpot is determined to have occurred. As is clear from the notation in FIG. 6(B), the jackpot type determined by the process of step S2188 is "5R sure chance" or "5R normal".

Next, the main CPU 81 stores information indicating the jackpot type identified by the process of step S2188 in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 as jackpot type preliminary determination information (step S2189).

Then, the main CPU 81 judges whether the jackpot pre-judgment information stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 by the processing of step S2185 is "provisional miss information" (step S2190). Here, if it is judged that the stored jackpot pre-judgment information is not "provisional miss information" (step S2190: NO), that is, if the stored jackpot pre-judgment information is "confirmed hit information" or "provisional hit information", it judges whether the current state is a high base state (step S2191).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is a high base state (step S2191: YES), i.e., when the game is in a guaranteed bonus game state or a time-limited game state, it reads out from the main ROM 82 the variation pattern selection table for the special 1 big win in the high base state and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2192). Conversely, when the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is not a high base state (step S2191: NO), i.e., when the game is in a normal game state, it reads out from the main ROM 82 the variation pattern selection table for the special 1 big win in the low base state and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2193).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot pre-judgment information stored in a specified area of the main RAM 83 by the processing of step S2185 is "definite miss information" (step S2186: YES), or if the main CPU 81 determines that the stored jackpot pre-judgment information is "provisional miss information" (step S2190: YES), it determines whether the current state is a high base state (step S2194).

If the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S2194: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the special 1 loss variation pattern selection table in the high base state from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195). ). Conversely, if it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S2194: NO), the variation pattern selection table for special 1 loss in the low base state is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S2196). .

When the main CPU 81 sets the variation pattern selection table through the process of step S2192, step S2193, step S2195, or step S2196, it executes special 1 variation pattern specifying process (step S2197). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is specified by reading from the fluctuation pattern selection table in which the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number obtained together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2184 is set. Then, special 1 variation pattern information indicating the variation pattern of the identified first special symbol is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S2198), and gaming state information indicating the current gaming state is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83. (Step S2199).

By executing the series of processes shown in FIG. 32, the various preliminary determination information described above based on FIG. 19(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83, and these preliminary determination information , is included in a suspension command related to the suspended first special symbol determination right and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90.

[Special pattern processing by main control board 80]
Next, details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be explained with reference to FIG. 33. Here, FIG. 33 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 29.

As illustrated in FIG. 33, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot game is in progress, and is set to "ON" when the jackpot game starts and is set to "OFF" when the jackpot game ends. Here, if it is determined that a jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), processing proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, if it is determined that the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the pending number T2 of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more. (Step S303). Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations T2 is greater than or equal to "1" (step S303: YES), the number of reservations T2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the reserved number T2 is not "1" or more (step S303: NO), it determines whether the reserved number T1 for the first special pattern determination stored in the main RAM 83 is "1" or more (step S305). Here, when it determines that the reserved number T1 is "1" or more (step S305: YES), it updates the reserved number T1 to a value subtracted by "1" (step S306).

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 81 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when executing the process of step S307 following the process of step S304, a shift process is executed to shift the information stored in the special figure 2/first reservation storage area 835 to the determination storage area 830. do. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage area after the special figure 2 second reserved storage area 836, a shift process is performed to shift this information to the special figure 2 first reserved storage area 835 side. Also execute. On the other hand, when performing a shift process following the process of step S306, a shift process is performed to shift the information stored in the special figure 1/first reservation storage area 831 to the determination storage area 830. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage area after the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832, a shift process is performed to shift this information to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 side. Also execute.

When the main CPU 81 stores information necessary for second special symbol determination (or first special symbol determination), such as jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers, in the determination storage area 830 through the shift process in step S307, the , executes the jackpot determination process in step S308 and the fluctuation pattern selection process in step S309.

In addition, when the game ball enters the first start hole 21 (or the second start hole 22) when the jackpot game is not in progress, the special symbol is not being changed, and the reserved number T1 for the first special symbol determination and the reserved number T2 for the second special symbol determination are both "0", information such as the jackpot random number and the symbol random number obtained in response to the winning is stored directly in the determination memory area 830. In such a case, the jackpot determination process and the change pattern selection process are executed without executing the shift process of step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random number stored in the determination memory area 830 (step S308). This jackpot determination process determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred, and if it is determined to be a jackpot, the type of jackpot (jackpot symbol) is determined. Then, setting information for the special symbol indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34.

Following the jackpot determination process in step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process to select a variation pattern of the special symbol (step S309). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 35.

Following the processing of step S309, the main CPU 81 sets in the main RAM 83 a change start command including the setting information for the special symbol set in the processing of step S308, information indicating whether the setting information for the special symbol is related to the first special symbol judgment or the second special symbol judgment, setting information for the change pattern selected in the processing of step S309, information regarding the game status of the gaming machine 1, etc. (step S310). This change start command is a command that instructs the start of a presentation accompanying the change display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission processing of step S8. This starts a change presentation including the change display of the presentation pattern on the display screen 70.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 81 starts variable display of the special symbol based on the setting information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the process of step S310 (step S311). At that time, if the processing from step S308 to step S310 is performed with the information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 41 Starts displaying fluctuations in . On the other hand, when the processing from step S308 to step S310 is performed with the information related to the second special symbol determination stored in the determination storage area 830, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 42 is Start variable display.

Next, the main CPU 81 starts measuring the elapsed time after starting the variable display of the special symbol in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S312 or determines that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302: YES), the elapsed time from which measurement was started in the process of step S312 is changed to the change in step S309. It is determined whether the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the pattern selection process has been reached (step S313). Here, if it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the variable time (step S313: NO), the process proceeds to normal symbol processing in step S4.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the elapsed time has reached the variation time (step S313: YES), it sets a variation end command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the variable display of the special symbol will end (step S314). This variation end command is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, a process is performed to stop the display of the performance symbol that was being displayed on the display screen 70 in a manner that indicates the result of the special symbol determination.

Following the process of step S314, the main CPU 81 ends the variable display of the special symbols started in the process of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (jackpot symbol or losing symbol) set in the process of step S308 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device that was variably displaying the special symbol. Note that this stop display of the special symbol continues until at least a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 81 causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays the special symbol (jackpot symbol or loss symbol) that indicates the determination result of the jackpot determination process. The first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Following the processing of step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time that was started to be measured in the processing of step S312 (step S316), and executes a special chart stop processing including a processing to start a jackpot game in the case of a jackpot (step S317). This special chart stop processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 36.

[Jackpot determination processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 34 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 33. The main CPU 81 first executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether the jackpot random number stored in the judgment storage area 830 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6(A)). judge. The winning value here is the jackpot winning value defined in the jackpot random number table for high probability times or the jackpot random number table for low probability times. When a jackpot determination is executed in a high probability state (this embodiment corresponds to the "probability variable gaming state"), the winning value stored in the high probability jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when a jackpot determination is executed in a low probability state (in this embodiment, "normal gaming state" and "time-saving gaming state" correspond to this state), the jackpot random number table for low probability states is stored in the jackpot random number table for low probability states. The winning value will be used.

In this way, when a start condition is met, such as when the acquired information, such as a jackpot random number, acquired upon the game ball entering the first start hole 21 or the second start hole 22 is stored in the judgment memory area 830, the main CPU 81 judges whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

Following the process of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether the determination result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082). Here, if it is determined that the determination result of the jackpot determination is not a "jackpot" (step S3082: NO), that is, if the determination result of the jackpot determination is a "lose", the setting information of the losing symbol is set in the main RAM 83. (Step S3083). As a result, during the process of step S315, the losing symbol set here will be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, no jackpot game is played.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" (step S3082: YES), the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 A jackpot symbol selection process is executed to select (step S3084). Specifically, if the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 830 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3081 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , one of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which jackpot symbol matches the random number value defined in the first starting opening winning symbol determination table (see FIG. 6(B)). In this case, one of the jackpot symbols X1 to X2 illustrated in FIG. 6(B) is selected. In addition, if the random symbol number is related to the second special symbol determination, the random number of the symbol matches the random number value of which jackpot symbol specified in the symbol determination table for winning the second starting opening. Based on this, select one of the jackpot symbols. In this case, one of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 illustrated in FIG. 6(C) is selected.

Then, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). As a result, during the processing of step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is displayed as a stopped jackpot symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and then a jackpot game corresponding to that jackpot symbol is played.

[Variation pattern selection processing by main control board 80]
FIG. 35 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 33, the main CPU 81 determines whether the determination result in step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). Here, if it is determined that it is a jackpot (step S3091: YES), the jackpot variation pattern selection table is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3091: NO), the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82 (reach effect effect). Based on whether or not the game player matches the corresponding random number value), it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a jackpot (step S3093). Here, if it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (step S3093: YES), the variable pattern selection table for reach loss is read out from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). On the other hand, if it is determined that the reach effect is not to be performed (step S3093: NO), the variable pattern selection table for no reach loss is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3095).

The main CPU 81 refers to the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the process of step S3092, the process of step S3094, or the process of step S3095, and executes the variation pattern random number determination process (step S3096). Specifically, when the fluctuation pattern selection table for jackpot or the fluctuation pattern selection table for reach loss is set in the main RAM 83, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is set. One variation pattern is selected by reading from the variation pattern selection table. In addition, when the variation pattern selection table for no-reach loss is set in the main RAM 83, based on the number of reservations T1 of the first special symbol determination (or the number of reservations T2 of the second special symbol determination) stored in the main RAM 83. One fluctuation pattern is selected by specifying the number of reservations and reading the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of reservations from the fluctuation pattern selection table for no-reach loss. By selecting the special symbol variation pattern in this way, the special symbol variation time is inevitably determined.

When the main CPU 81 selects a variation pattern, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). This fluctuation pattern setting information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub control board 90 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process in step S308 described above.

[Processing when special drawing is stopped by the main control board 80]
Fig. 36 is a detailed flow chart of the special symbol stop processing in step S317 in Fig. 33. After resetting the elapsed time by the processing of step S316, the main CPU 81 judges whether or not it is a jackpot (step S3171) as in the processing of step S3082 (see Fig. 34), as exemplified in Fig. 36. If it is judged to be a jackpot (step S3171: YES), the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the high probability game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3173), and sets the time-saving game flag also stored in the main RAM 83 to "OFF" (step S3174). Here, the high probability game flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the probability of a jackpot being determined in the special symbol determination is relatively high.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the high probability game flag and the time-saving game flag. That is, when the gaming state is controlled to the "high probability game state", both the high probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are set to "ON". When the gaming state is controlled to the "normal game state", both the high probability game flag and the time-saving game flag are set to "OFF". When the gaming state is controlled to the "time-saving game state", the high probability game flag is set to "OFF" and the time-saving game flag is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the jackpot game is started (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 26 (or the second big winning hole 28 or the V winning hole 287) during the jackpot game, and is sent in the transmission process of step S8. It is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a jackpot (step S3171: NO), it determines whether or not the high probability play flag is set to "ON" (step S3176). Here, if it determines that the high probability play flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, if the special symbol determination is being performed in a high probability state, it updates the remaining number of high probability play times K stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). This remaining number of high probability play times K indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol determination will be performed in a high probability state.

Following the process of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of high probability games K is "0" (step S3178). Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of high probability games K is "0" (step S3178: YES), the variable probability game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). As a result, special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state.

If the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S3179, if it determines that the variable probability game flag is not set to "ON" (step S3176: NO), or if the remaining number of high probability games K is not "0", If it is determined (step S3178: NO), it is determined whether the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, if it is determined that the time-saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), the remaining number of time-saving games J stored in the main RAM 83 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3181). This time saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the time saving state (high base state).

Following the processing of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether the remaining number of times J for time-saving play is "0" (step S3182). Here, if it is determined that the remaining number of times J for time-saving play is "0" (step S3182: YES), the time-saving play flag is set to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 22 is no longer provided.

[Big prize opening/closing control process by the main control board 80]
Figures 37 to 39 are detailed flow charts of the big prize opening opening control process in step S6 in Figure 29. Following the second start opening opening control process in step S5 in Figure 29, the main CPU 81 judges whether or not the big prize game flag is set to "ON" (step S601), as exemplified in Figure 37. If it is judged that the big prize game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process in step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to "ON" (step S601: YES), it determines whether or not it is in the opening period for the jackpot game (step S602), for example, based on whether or not the elapsed time since the opening command for the jackpot game was set by the processing of step S3175 (see FIG. 36) has reached a predetermined opening time.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). Here, if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7. On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the opening time has elapsed (step S603: YES), it sets the number of rounds Rmax of the jackpot game, the operation pattern, etc., and stores the setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S604). . Specifically, the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax based on the opening pattern of the jackpot in each jackpot illustrated in FIGS. 6(B) and (C), and sets the number of rounds Rmax, and The respective operation patterns of the opening/closing member 27, opening/closing member 29, and slide member 285 are set so that the two major winning openings 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot.

By executing the process of step S604, various times related to the jackpot game, such as the interval time that is the time from the end of a round game until the start of the next round game, and the ending time after the end of the final round game, are also determined. It is also set.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S604, it updates the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 to a value incremented by "1" (step S605). This number of rounds R is set to "0" before the start of the jackpot game, and is updated to a value incremented by "1" each time the process of step S605 is executed.

Following the processing of step S605, the main CPU 81 judges whether the round number R updated in the processing of step S605 is "1" (step S606). In this embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 6 (B) and (C), for all big wins, the second big prize opening 28 is used for the round play of the first round, and the first big prize opening 26 is used for the round play of the second round and thereafter. Therefore, when the main CPU 81 judges that the round number R is "1" (step S606: YES), it starts the second big prize opening opening/closing control that controls the opening and closing of the second big prize opening 28 (and the V big prize opening 287) via the second big prize opening solenoid 282 (and the V big prize opening solenoid 286) (step S607). Then, it sets the second big prize opening opening/closing round play start command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the round play to open and close the second big prize opening 28 is to start (step S808).

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R updated in the processing of step S605 is not "1" (step S606: NO), that is, if the number of rounds R is "2" or more, it starts the first large prize opening opening/closing control, which controls the opening and closing of the first large prize opening 26 via the first large prize opening solenoid 262 (step S609).

Following the processing of step S609, the main CPU 81 sets a first large prize opening/closing round game start command in the main RAM 83 to notify that a round game of opening and closing the first large prize opening 26 will begin (step S610).

The second big prize opening opening/closing round game start command set in the process of step S608 and the first big prize opening opening/closing round game start command set in the process of step S610 are transmitted by the transmission process of step S8 in FIG. , is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines in the processing of step S602 that the current period is not the opening period of the jackpot game (step S602: NO), it determines whether or not the current period is the ending period of the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it determines whether or not the current period is the ending period based on whether or not the elapsed time since the end of the final round of the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. Here, if it is determined that the current period is the ending period (step S613: YES), the processing proceeds to step S626 (see FIG. 39) described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending period in the jackpot game is not in progress (step S613: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the ending period in the jackpot game is in progress (step S613: NO). It is determined whether or not (step S614). Here, if it is determined that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), the process proceeds to step S617 (see FIG. 38), which will be described later.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is in the interval period (step S614: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the interval time set in the process of step S604 has elapsed since the previous round game ended. (Step S615). Here, if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S615: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7. Conversely, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), the processes from step S605 described above are executed.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not an interval period (step S614: NO), that is, when a round game is being played, it determines whether the second large prize winning opening 28 is open or not, as illustrated in FIG. 38 (step S617). Specifically, after executing the process of step S607, it determines whether the second large prize winning opening 28 is open or not based on whether or not both a first end condition for the opening and closing control of the second large prize winning opening 28, that a predetermined number of game balls win from the start of opening the second large prize winning opening 28, and a second end condition for the opening and closing control of the second large prize winning opening 28, that a predetermined time (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed from the start of opening the second large prize winning opening 28, are satisfied. If neither the first end condition nor the second end condition is satisfied, it can be determined that the second large prize winning opening 28 is open. If it is determined here that the second large prize opening 28 is not open (step S617: NO), processing proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines that the second large prize opening 28 is open (step S616: YES), it determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the V prize opening 287 based on the presence or absence of a detection signal from the V prize opening sensor 283 (step S618). If it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V prize opening 287 (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 287 (step S618: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to "ON" (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 287 (that is, whether the game ball has won a V prize or not), and although it is normally set to "OFF", When the passage of a game ball is detected by the V winning a prize opening sensor 283, it is set to "ON".

Following the process of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command in the main RAM 83 to notify that the game ball has won a V prize (step S620).

When the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S620, when it determines that the second large prize opening 28 is not open (step S617: NO), or when it determines that the game ball has not passed through the V prize opening 287 (step S618: NO), it determines whether or not the second large prize opening opening opening control started in the processing of step S607 (or the first large prize opening opening opening control started in the processing of step S609) has ended (step S621). Here, if it is determined that the large prize opening opening opening control has not ended (step S621: NO), the processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the grand prize opening opening/closing control has ended (step S621: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 matches the number of rounds Rmax set in the process of step S604. It is determined whether or not (step S622). Here, if it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), it starts measuring the ending time, which is the time elapsed since the ending period started (step S623), and determines whether the ending period is the same as the ending period. An ending command notifying the start is set in the main RAM 83 (step S624). This ending command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 by the transmission process in step S8.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 81 determines in the processing of step S613 in FIG. 37 that it is during the ending period (step S613: YES), it determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. 39 (step S626). Specifically, it determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time that began to be measured in the processing of step S623 has reached the ending time set in the processing of step S604. Here, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), processing proceeds to the prize ball processing of step S7.

If the main CPU 81 determines that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S627). Here, if it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), the probability variable game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S628), and the main RAM 83 The remaining number of high probability games K stored in is set to "100" (step S629), and although not shown in FIG. 39, the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "OFF". .

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S629, or when it determines that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), it sets the time-saving play flag to "ON" (step S630). Then, it sets the remaining number of times J for time-saving play to "100" (step S631), sets the jackpot play flag to "OFF", and ends the series of processes (step S632).

[Interrupt Processing by Sub-Control Board 90]
When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the sub-CPU 91 of the sub-control board 90 sets an interrupt cycle, which is a cycle for performing an interrupt process described below. The sub-CPU 91 then repeats a random number update process for updating a performance random number, etc., used to determine the content of a performance, at a predetermined cycle shorter than the interrupt cycle. In other words, while the gaming machine 1 is running, the sub-CPU 91 repeats the random number update process at a predetermined cycle and also repeats the interrupt process at the interrupt cycle.

The interrupt processing executed in the sub control board 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the sub control board 90. Similar to the interrupt processing performed by the main control board 80 (see FIG. 29), the sub CPU 91 repeatedly executes a series of processing illustrated in FIG. 40 at regular intervals (eg, 4 milliseconds). Note that the processing performed by the sub control board 90 described based on the flowcharts from FIG. 40 onwards is performed according to instructions issued by the sub CPU 91 based on the program stored in the sub ROM 92.

When the sub CPU 91 receives a command from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 first executes a command reception process to perform processing according to the command (step S10). This command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 41.

Following the processing of step S10, the sub-CPU 91 executes an operation reception process in which processing is performed according to the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine 1 (step S30). This operation reception process will be described in detail later with reference to Figures 53 to 55.

Following the processing of step S30, the sub-CPU 91 executes a command transmission process (step S40). Specifically, the sub-CPU 91 transmits the command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the command reception process of step S10 or the operation acceptance process of step S30 to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120). By executing this command transmission process, the image and sound control board 100 is instructed to execute a performance by displaying an image, outputting a performance sound, etc., and the lamp control board 120 is instructed to execute a performance by lighting various lamps and using movable props, etc.

Following the processing of step S40, the sub-CPU 91 executes a data transfer process (step S50). Specifically, data related to image and sound control is sent from the image and sound control board 100, and the data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the lamp control board 120 controls the performances by the performance means such as the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, and the movable decorative member 14 so as to be synchronized with the performances performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 41, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not it has received a command from the main control board 80 (step S11). Here, if it is determined that no command has been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

When the sub-CPU 91 determines that it has received a command from the main control board 80 (step S11: YES), it determines whether or not the command is a pending command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S212 or step S220 in FIG. 30 (step S12). If it is determined that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S15, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a pending command (step S12: YES), it executes pending command reception processing (step S13). This pending command reception processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 42.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a hold command (step S12: NO), it determines whether the command is a fluctuation start command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S310 in FIG. 33 (step S15). If it determines that the received command is not a fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S17, which will be described later.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes a fluctuation start command reception process (step S16). This fluctuation start command reception process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 44.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a start-of-variation command (step S15: NO), it determines whether the command is an end-of-variation command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S314 in FIG. 33 (step S17). If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the command is an end-of-variation command (step S17: YES), it sets in the sub-RAM 93 a change-of-variation end command that instructs the execution of a process to end the display of the change of the performance pattern and stop and display the performance pattern in a manner that indicates the result of the special pattern determination executed at the start of the pattern change (step S18).

This variable performance end command is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command sending process of step S40, and as a result, a special pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination (or the second special pattern determination) is displayed frozen on the first special pattern display 41 (or the second special pattern display 42), a performance pattern indicating the result of the first special pattern determination (or the second special pattern determination) is displayed frozen on the display screen 70.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a variation end command (step S17: NO), it determines whether the command is an opening command sent from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S3175 in FIG. 36 (step S19). If it determines that the received command is an opening command (step S19: YES), it sets an opening performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to start an opening performance that notifies the player of the type of jackpot and encourages the player to hit to the right during the opening period of the jackpot game (step S20).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not an opening command (step S19: NO), it determines whether the command is a round game start command (step S21). That is, the second grand prize opening opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process of step S608 in FIG. 37, or the command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the process in step S610 in FIG. It is determined whether the first big prize opening opening/closing round game start command has been received.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is a round game start command (step S21: YES), it executes a round game start command reception process that performs processing according to the received round game start command (step S22). .

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a round game start command (step S21: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the command is the V winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 in accordance with the process of step S620 in FIG. It is determined whether there is one (step S23). Here, if it is determined that the received command is a V-winning command (step S23: YES), a V-winning command reception process is executed in accordance with the V-winning command (step S24). Specifically, a V winning notification command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) to execute the V winning notification performance illustrated in FIG.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not a V winning command (step S23: NO), it instructs the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) to execute a predetermined ending effect. The ending command receiving process including the process of setting the ending effect start command in the sub RAM 93 is executed (step S25). The ending effect start command set in the sub-RAM 93 through the process of step S25 is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), thereby executing the mode selection promotion effect described above.

[Hold command reception process by the sub-control board 90]
Fig. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command receiving process in step S13 in Fig. 41. When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), it updates the hold number of special symbol determinations stored in the sub-RAM 93 to a value incremented by "1" (step S130), as illustrated in Fig. 42. Specifically, when a hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value incremented by "1", and when a hold command related to the second special symbol determination is received, the hold number of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value incremented by "1".

Following the processing of step S131, the sub-CPU 91 stores the advance judgment information included in the received pending command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S131). Next, the sub-CPU 91 acquires an icon change performance random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S132). This icon change performance random number is incremented by "1" each time the random number update processing described above is performed, and the sub-CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time the pending command is received as the icon change performance random number. Then, based on the acquired change performance random number, an icon change performance lottery is executed (step S133). Specifically, it is determined whether the acquired change performance random number matches any of the random number values related to the icon change performance random numbers previously stored in the sub-ROM 92.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores a table in which the pre-determination result for the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the random number value for the icon change performance random number are associated. The sub-CPU 91 refers to this table and determines whether or not to execute the icon change performance based on whether the acquired icon change performance random number matches any of the random number values associated with the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified from the pre-determination information stored in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S134. In addition, in this table, more random number values are associated with "jackpot" than with "miss" for the pre-determination result for the first special symbol determination. Also, the longer the variation time of the first special symbol, the more random number values are associated with the variation pattern. For this reason, in the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability, the easier it is to execute the icon change performance, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability, the harder it is to execute the icon change performance.

The sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to perform the icon change effect based on the lottery result in step S133 (step S134). Here, if it is determined that the icon change effect is not to be executed (step S134: NO), a pending icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S135). In this way, when the process proceeds to step S135 following step S134, a pending command that does not include icon change effect pattern information is set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process of step S135, and the image and sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120). In this case, although a pending icon is displayed based on the pending command, an icon change effect using this pending icon is not performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the icon change effect (step S134: YES), the jackpot preliminary determination information of the preliminary determination information included in the pending icon received this time is "provisional loss information". It is determined whether or not (step S137). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot preliminary determination information is not "temporary loss information" (step S137: NO), it is determined whether the jackpot preliminary determination information is "loss confirmed information" (step S138).

When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the jackpot pre-determination information is "definite miss information" (step S138: YES), it reads out the miss icon change presentation pattern selection table from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S139). On the other hand, when it determines that the jackpot pre-determination information is not "definite miss information" (step S138: NO), that is, when the jackpot pre-determination information is "definite hit information" or "provisional hit information", it reads out the jackpot icon change presentation pattern selection table from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S139). Then, when it determines that the jackpot pre-determination information is "provisional miss information" (step S137: YES), it reads out the provisional miss icon change presentation pattern selection table from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S141).

When the sub-CPU 91 sets one of the icon change performance pattern selection tables by the process of step S139, step S140, or step S141, it executes the icon change performance pattern selection process (step S142). In the icon change performance pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93, a random number value is associated with each of the multiple icon change performance patterns. In the process of step S142, the sub-CPU 91 selects one performance pattern of the icon change performance by reading out the icon change performance pattern corresponding to the random number value that matches the icon change performance random number obtained by the process of step S132 from the icon change performance pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93. Then, it stores icon change performance pattern information indicating the performance pattern of the selected icon change performance in the sub-RAM 93 (step S143), and executes the process of the above step S135.

In this way, when executing the processing of step S135 following the processing of step S143, the sub-CPU 91 sets the pending icon display command including the icon change performance pattern information stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S143 in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93.

The hold icon display command set in the sub-RAM 93 by the process in step S135 is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S40. On the other hand, if the icon change effect pattern information is included in the received pending icon display command, the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 uses the icon change effect pattern information as setting information for the icon change effect. The setting information is stored in the control RAM 103, and based on this setting information, the VDP 104 and the audio DSP 107 are instructed to execute the processing necessary to realize the icon change effect.

In addition, when comparing the icon change performance pattern selection table for loses and the icon change performance pattern selection table for jackpots, it is better to select the icon change performance pattern based on the latter table. Compared to the case where a change effect pattern is selected, the final display mode of the icon is more likely to change to a higher-order display mode. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, an icon change effect may be executed in which the display color of the icon changes from white, which is the default display color, to blue, green, and red in that order, and based on the latter table, If you select the icon change effect pattern, the icon display color will eventually change to green or red, whereas if you select the icon change effect pattern based on the latter table, the icon display color will change. There is a tendency that the color of the icon rarely changes to red, and the display color of the icon often changes only to blue or green.

On the other hand, the icon change performance pattern selection table for temporary loss stores icon change performance patterns for realizing the icon change performance related to the special chart 1 third reservation described based on FIG. 21. In addition, receiving a reservation command including "temporary loss information" means that if a jackpot random number or the like is obtained in a low probability state and a special pattern determination is performed while in the low probability state, it is determined as a "loss", but if a special pattern determination is performed after transitioning from a low probability state to a high probability state, it is determined as a "jackpot". For this reason, the icon change performance pattern selection table for temporary loss stores icon change performance patterns for performing icon change performance after the game state is set to the "probable variable game state" at the end of the jackpot game corresponding to the special chart 1 first reservation in the situation shown in FIG. 21, without performing an icon change performance targeting the special chart 1 third reservation.

In this embodiment, when a pending command containing "confirmed win information" or "provisional win information" is received, an icon change presentation pattern is selected by referring to the icon change presentation pattern selection table for big wins, whereas when a pending command containing "provisional loss information" is received, an icon change presentation pattern is selected by referring to another table called the icon change presentation pattern selection table for provisional losses.

In contrast to this, in other embodiments, the icon change presentation pattern may be selected by referring to the jackpot icon change presentation pattern selection table not only when a pending command containing "confirmed win information" or "provisional win information" is received, but also when a pending command containing "provisional loss information" is received.

[Special chart 2 reserved jackpot suggestion performance processing by sub-control board 90]
43 is a flow chart illustrating a special reserved jackpot suggestion performance process. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special reserved jackpot suggestion performance (see FIG. 22) can be executed during the third round of the jackpot game, provided that the reserved second special pattern judgment rights include one that will be judged as a "jackpot". The process executed by the sub-CPU 91 to execute this special reserved jackpot suggestion performance is as follows.

That is, the sub-CPU 91 judges whether or not the third round of round play will start based on whether or not the third round play start command has been received from the main control board 80 after the jackpot game has started (step S2301). If it is judged that the third round of round play will not start (step S2301: NO), the jackpot suggestion display process in the reserved special chart 2 ends, and the process returns to step S2301.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the third round game is to be started (step S2301: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether special 2 preliminary determination information is stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S2302). Here, if it is determined that the special 2 preliminary determination information is not stored, that is, the right to determine the second special symbol is not reserved (step S2302: NO), the special symbol 2 pending jackpot suggestion production process is executed. Upon completion, the process returns to step S2301.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the special 2 advance judgment information is stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S2302: YES), it determines whether or not the V winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 in response to the processing of step S620 in FIG. 38 has been received (step S2303). Specifically, for example, if a V winning command has been received, V winning command received information indicating this is stored in the sub-RAM 93, and it determines whether or not the V winning command has been received based on whether or not this V winning command received information is stored in the sub-RAM 93.

If the V winning command has already been received, the processing of steps S628 and S629 in FIG. 39 is executed at the end of the current jackpot game, and the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) will be executed in a high probability state after the jackpot game ends. For this reason, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that the V winning command has been received (step S2303: YES), it sets the provisional high probability flag stored in the sub-RAM 93 to ON (step S2304). This provisional high probability flag is a flag for carrying out subsequent processing on the assumption that a high probability state has been reached in the case where the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) will be executed in a high probability state after the jackpot game ends.

The special symbol 2 reserved jackpot suggestion presentation process illustrated in FIG. 43 is performed at the start of the third round of jackpot play. In other words, the special symbol 2 reserved jackpot suggestion presentation process is a process that is performed when the state related to the special symbol judgment is a "low probability state." If the game ball enters a V during the first round of jackpot play, the game state will transition from the normal game state to the probability change game state at the end of the jackpot play, that is, from the low probability state to the high probability state. Therefore, if the state after the end of the jackpot play is a high probability state, the subsequent processing will be performed assuming that the high probability state has been reached at the start of the third round of jackpot play (the provisional high probability flag will be set to ON).

As described above, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the V winning command has been received (step S2303: YES), it sets the provisional high certainty flag to ON through the process of step S2304. In addition, even if this jackpot game is triggered by a "normal jackpot" or if it is a jackpot game related to a guaranteed variable jackpot, if the game ball does not win a V prize during the first round of play, , V winning commands are never transmitted from the main control board 80. Therefore, if it is determined that the V winning command has not been received (step S2303: NO), the process proceeds to step S2305, which will be described later, without executing the process of step S2304.

When the sub-CPU 91 executes the process of step S2304 or determines that the V winning command has not been received (step S2303: NO), it determines whether the special 2 pre-determination information determined to be stored in the sub-RAM 93 in the process of step S2302 contains "winning confirmation information" as jackpot pre-determination information (step S2305). If it is determined that "winning confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES), a jackpot will always occur in the reserve regardless of whether the state after the current jackpot game ends is a low probability state or a high probability state. For this reason, if it is determined that "winning confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308 described later in order to execute the above-mentioned special chart 2 reserved jackpot suggestion performance based on FIG. 22.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the "winning confirmation information" is not included (step S2305: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the "win confirmed information" is not included in the special 2 advance determination information determined to be stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S2302. It is determined whether or not all of the jackpot preliminary determination information is "loss confirmation information" (step S2306). Here, if all the jackpot preliminary judgment information is "loss confirmation information", regardless of whether the state after the jackpot game is low probability state or high probability state, the pending second special symbol judgment All judgment results are "lost". In this case, since the execution conditions for the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance are not met, if all the jackpot preliminary determination information is determined to be "loss confirmation information" (step S2306: YES), a series of special drawing 2 pending The inner jackpot suggestion production process is completed, and the process returns to step S2301.

When the sub-CPU 91 determines that not all of the jackpot pre-judgment information is "definite miss information" (step S2306: NO), i.e., when the jackpot pre-judgment information contained in the special 2 pre-judgment information determined to be stored in the sub-RAM 93 in the processing of step S2302 contains "provisional miss information" or "provisional win information", it determines whether the provisional high probability flag is set to ON (step S2307).

As shown in FIG. 19(A), "provisional miss information" is information indicating that if the state at the start of the fluctuation (when the reserved amount is consumed) is a low probability state, it will be judged as a "miss," and if the state at the start of the fluctuation (when the reserved amount is consumed) is a high probability state, it will be judged as a "jackpot." Also, "provisional hit information" is information indicating that if the state at the start of the fluctuation (when the reserved amount is consumed) is a high probability state, it will be judged as a "jackpot," and if the state at the start of the fluctuation (when the reserved amount is consumed) is a low probability state, it will be judged as a "miss."

In this way, the "temporary loss information" and the "temporary hit information" indicate that when the special symbol determination is executed in a low probability state, the determination result will be "loss", and the determination result will be "loss" when the special symbol determination is executed in a high probability state. Both have in common that in some cases, the judgment result is a "jackpot." If "temporary loss information" or "temporary win information" is stored in the sub-RAM 93, and if the state after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state, the conditions for executing the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance are satisfied. Conversely, if the state after the end of the jackpot game is a low probability state, the conditions for executing the special drawing 2 pending jackpot suggestion performance will not be satisfied.

Therefore, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the "temporary miss information" or "temporary win information" has been stored and then determines that the provisional high probability flag is set to ON (step S2307: YES), i.e., if the second special pattern determination corresponding to the "temporary miss information" or "temporary win information" is executed in a high probability state, the conditions for executing the jackpot suggestion performance in the reserved special pattern 2 are met, and the sub-CPU 91 executes the following processing.

That is, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the tentative high probability flag is set to ON (step S2307: YES), or when it determines that "win confirmation information" is included (step S2305: YES) , it is determined whether the special drawing 2 jackpot that occurs during the hold is a "probable jackpot" (step S2308).

When the right to determine the second special symbol is reserved, the main control board 80 transmits "jackpot type pre-determination information" together with the jackpot pre-determination information (here, "confirmed win information," "provisional miss information," or "provisional win information") in the reservation command. This is as described above based on the jackpot type pre-determination information column in FIG. 19(B). Based on this jackpot type pre-determination information, it is possible to determine whether the result of the second special symbol determination corresponding to the jackpot pre-determination information transmitted together is a "guaranteed jackpot" or a "regular jackpot."

For this reason, in step S2308, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether the special chart 2 jackpot occurring in the reserved state is a "high probability jackpot" or not based on the "jackpot type advance judgment information" stored in the sub-RAM 93 together with the "jackpot advance judgment information" that is the subject of the jackpot suggestion performance in the special chart 2 reserved state.

Here, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the jackpot that occurs within the hold is a "probable variable jackpot" (step S2308: YES), the sub CPU 91 performs the special drawing 2 pending probable variable jackpot suggestion performance based on FIG. 22(A). In order to execute this, a pending probability variable jackpot suggestion background display command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S2309). On the contrary, if it is determined that the jackpot that occurs in the hold is not a "probable strange jackpot" (step S2308: NO), to execute the above-mentioned special drawing 2 hold normal jackpot suggestion effect based on FIG. 22(B) Then, a pending normal jackpot suggestion background display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S2310).

The jackpot suggestion background display command set by the processing of step S2309 or step S2310 is sent to the image and sound control board 100 by the command sending processing of step S40 in FIG. 40. In response to this, the image and sound control CPU 101 of the image and sound control board 100 executes processing based on the received command, thereby realizing a special chart 2 reserved special jackpot suggestion performance or a special chart 2 reserved regular jackpot suggestion performance.

When the sub-CPU 91 executes the process of step S2309 or step S2310, it sets the provisional high probability flag stored in the sub-RAM 93 to OFF (step S2311), and ends the series of processes for the special chart 2 reserved jackpot suggestion presentation.

[Variation start command reception processing by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. If the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is a fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), it executes a series of fluctuation start command reception processes illustrated in FIG. 44 .

That is, the sub CPU 91 obtains the value at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 regarding the effect random number that is updated as appropriate by the random number update process in the sub control board 90, and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S161). . Then, the received variation start command is analyzed (step S162).

As described above, this fluctuation start command includes the setting information of the pattern indicating the judgment result of the jackpot judgment process, the winning start port information indicating whether the setting information of the pattern is related to the first special pattern judgment or the second special pattern judgment, the setting information of the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern, and the information indicating the game state of the gaming machine 1. Therefore, by analyzing the fluctuation start command, the type and result of the special pattern judgment can be identified. In other words, it is possible to identify whether it is a jackpot or a miss, and if it is a jackpot, what type of jackpot it is. In addition, by identifying whether the fluctuation pattern is a miss fluctuation pattern based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform a reach-enabled or reach-disabled performance. Similarly, based on the setting information of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the special pattern can be identified. Also, based on the information indicating the game state, the current game state of the gaming machine 1 can be identified.

When the sub-CPU 91 analyzes the variation start command, it executes a variable presentation pattern setting process that sets the variable presentation pattern of the variable presentation accompanying the variable display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S163). By executing this variable presentation pattern setting process, the variation mode of the presentation symbol, the presence or absence of a reach presentation, the presence or absence of a pseudo consecutive presentation, the type of presentation symbol that constitutes the reach presentation, the type and content of the reach presentation, the content of the pseudo consecutive presentation, the type of presentation symbol that is stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. This variable presentation pattern setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45.

Following the process of step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes a preview performance pattern setting process that performs settings regarding various preview performances to be executed when the performance symbols are variably displayed in the variable performance pattern set in the process of step S163. (Step S164). This preview effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 46.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 sets a variable performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the start of a variable performance in the variable performance pattern set in the processing of step S163, and to execute a preview performance in the preview performance pattern set in the processing of step S164 (step S173).

This variable performance start command includes information indicating the variable performance pattern set by the processing of step S163 and information indicating the preview performance pattern set by the processing of step S164, and is sent to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command sending processing of step S40 in FIG. 40. As a result, the variable performance and preview performance, whose performance patterns have been determined by the sub-control board 90, are realized by the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Following the processing of step S173, the sub-CPU 91 updates the reserved number stored in the sub-RAM 93 to a value minus "1" (step S174). Specifically, if the change start command received from the main control board 80 notifies the start of the changing display of the first special pattern, the reserved number for the first special pattern determination is updated to a value minus "1". On the other hand, if the change start command received notifies the start of the changing display of the second special pattern, the reserved number for the second special pattern determination is updated to a value minus "1".

[Variation effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 45 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. Following the process of step S162, the sub CPU 91 sets a final performance symbol to be finally displayed (main stop) on the display screen 70 along with the stop display of the first special symbol (or second special symbol). A symbol setting process is executed (step S1631).

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the game is controlled in a sure-win game state (or a time-saving game state), if the reserved rights to determine the second special symbol include one that will result in the execution of a "win notification effect," specifically, when a reserved command including "winning information" is received from the main control board 80 in response to the reservation of the right to determine the second special symbol, one of the strange miss notification effects A to C described above is executed based on Figures 25 to 27 using the pattern change that precedes the pattern change that is executed in response to the second special symbol determination being made.

Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a hold command related to the right to determine the second special symbol including "win confirmation information" while the game is being controlled in the variable probability gaming state (or time saving gaming state), the sub CPU 91 may feel something strange. It is decided whether to execute the loss notification effect or not. In addition, in the discomfort loss notification performance, the variation pattern of the second special symbol for the no-reach loss performance is selected for the symbol variation that is performed before the symbol variation that causes the hit notification performance to be executed. It will be carried out on the condition that Therefore, based on the variation pattern information included in the pending command received before the above-mentioned pending command, it was possible to identify that the variation pattern of the second special symbol was a variation pattern for a no-reach effect. Only in certain cases will we perform a performance to notify you of a loss.

When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the discomfort loss notification performance, for example, it executes a lottery using random numbers to determine which discomfort loss notification performance among the discomfort loss notification performances A to C to be executed. Then, by the process of step S1631, regarding the symbol variation for executing the determined discomfort loss notification performance, a process is performed to set three performance symbols on the display screen 70 that cause a pseudo stop and then a real stop.

Here, when performing the discomfort loss notification effect A (see Fig. 25), three effect symbols are used as the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, which are composed of two number symbols and one character symbol. Set the combination of Furthermore, when performing the discomfort loss notification performance B (see FIG. 26), a combination of three performance symbols including the middle 7 symbols is set as the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol. In addition, when performing the discomfort loss notification performance C (see FIG. 27), a combination of three performance symbols whose display positions are shifted from the normal one is set as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol.

Based on this processing, the change effects and stop effects are executed in the special probability game state (or the time-saving game state), and the strange miss notification effects A to C are realized.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 judges whether or not it is necessary to perform a reach effect in association with the current display of the special symbol change, based on the setting information of the special symbol change pattern included in the received change start command (step S1632). If it is judged that it is not necessary to perform a reach effect (step S1632: NO), it sets a change effect pattern for a non-reach effect (step S1633). For example, from a no-reach change effect pattern selection table in which multiple types of no-reach change effect patterns are associated with each special symbol change pattern, one of the change effect patterns corresponding to the effect random number obtained in the processing of step S161 is read out, and information indicating the change effect pattern is set in the sub-RAM 93.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a reach effect is required (step S1632: YES), it sets a variable presentation pattern for the reach effect (step S1634). For example, it reads out one of the variable presentation patterns corresponding to the presentation random number obtained in the processing of step S161 from a variable presentation pattern selection table for reach effect in which multiple types of variable presentation patterns for reach effect are associated with each combination of the result of the special pattern determination and the variable pattern of the special pattern, and sets information indicating the variable presentation pattern in the sub-RAM 93.

By performing the process of step S1633 or step S1634, it is possible to determine in what kind of variation pattern the performance symbols are to be displayed in a variable manner, which reach effect is to be performed when performing a reach effect, and when developing a reach effect. This will determine how the reach performance will be developed.

Regarding the defeat reach described above based on FIG. 17, the sub-ROM 92 stores information indicating a variation pattern of the second special symbol dedicated to the defeat reach (defeat reach-exclusive variation pattern). When the sub-CPU 91 receives a variation start command related to the second special symbol determination including information indicating the same variation pattern as the defeat reach-exclusive variation pattern while the game is being controlled in a sure-change game state, it executes the processing of step S1634 described above to set the variation presentation pattern of the defeat reach.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a variable performance start command that instructs the start of a variable performance in the variable performance pattern set in the processing of step S1633 (or the processing of step S1634) is sent from the sub-control board 90 to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120), thereby realizing a variable performance including a variable display of the performance pattern.

[Advance presentation pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 46 is a detailed flowchart of the preview effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. Following the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of advance notice effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG.

The sub-CPU 91 first executes a special cut-in performance pattern setting process (step S165). This special cut-in performance pattern setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned special cut-in based on Figures 12 and 13, and for determining the performance pattern (timing) to be used when it is determined to execute the special cut-in. This special cut-in performance pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 47.

Following the processing of step S165, the sub-CPU 91 executes a character standby performance pattern setting process (step S166). This character standby performance pattern setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the character standby performance described above based on FIG. 12, and, if it is determined that the performance is to be executed, for determining what performance pattern the character standby performance will be executed in. This character standby performance pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 48.

Following the processing of step S166, the sub-CPU 91 executes a subjugation presentation pattern setting process (step S167). This subjugation presentation pattern setting process is performed when a variable presentation pattern for the presentation symbols for the subjugation reach is set by the processing of step S1634 in FIG. 45, and is a process for determining the flow in which each presentation constituting the subjugation reach described above based on FIG. 17 will proceed. This subjugation presentation pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 49.

Following the processing of step S167, the sub-CPU 91 executes a chance presentation pattern setting process (step S168). This chance presentation pattern setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the chance presentation described above based on FIGS. 23 and 24, and, if executed, for determining what presentation pattern to execute. This chance presentation pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 50.

Following the process of step S168, the sub CPU 91 executes a suggestive effect pattern setting process (step S169). This suggestion effect pattern setting process determines whether or not to execute the above-mentioned suggestion effect (low suggestion effect or high suggestion effect) based on FIGS. 23 and 24, and if so, which suggestion effect to execute. This is the process for determining the This suggestion effect pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 51.

Following the process of step S169, the sub CPU 91 executes another preview performance pattern setting process (step S171). This other preview performance pattern setting process is a process for setting performance patterns for other preview performances that are different from the respective preview performances for which performance patterns are set in steps S165 to S169. Other preview performance pattern setting processing is performed in the same manner as the conventional processing for setting performance patterns for existing preview performances, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Following the processing of step S171, the sub-CPU 91 executes a related performance pattern setting process (step S172). This related performance pattern setting process is a process for determining whether or not to execute each of the related performances described above based on Figures 14 to 16, and, if executed, for determining what performance pattern the related performance will be executed with. This related performance pattern setting process will be described in detail later based on Figure 52.

[Special cut-in effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 47 is a detailed flowchart of the special cut-in effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. Following the variable effect pattern setting process of step S163 in FIG. 44, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of special cut-in effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. 47.

The sub-CPU 91 first obtains a special cut-in effect random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1650). This special cut-in effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the special cut-in described above based on Figures 12 and 13, and is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed. In response to this, the sub-CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time when it receives the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as the special cut-in effect random number, and stores it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 executes a special cut-in lottery (step S1651). The sub-ROM 92 stores a random number value (winning value) to be compared with the special cut-in effect random number, and the sub-CPU 91 determines whether to execute a special cut-in based on whether the special cut-in effect random number acquired and stored by the processing of step S1650 matches any of the random number values (winning values) stored in the sub-ROM 92.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores a random number value (winning value) for a jackpot and a random number value (winning value) for a miss as the random number values (winning values). When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, it compares the acquired and stored special cut-in performance random number with the random number value (winning value) for a jackpot. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, it compares the acquired and stored special cut-in performance random number with the random number value (winning value) for a miss.

It should be noted that the sub ROM 92 stores more random numbers as random numbers for jackpots (winning values) than random numbers for loses (winning values). For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is "jackpot", it is likely to be decided to execute the special cut-in, and conversely, " If it is a "loss", executing a special cut-in makes it difficult to determine.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a special cut-in based on the result of the lottery in step S1651 (step S1652). If it is determined that a special cut-in is not to be executed (step S1652: NO), the series of special cut-in performance pattern setting processes ends, and processing proceeds to the character standby performance pattern setting process in step S166, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute a special cut-in (step S1652: YES), it executes a special cut-in effect pattern selection process (step S1653). The special cut-in in this embodiment has one type of effect, but is a preview effect whose execution timing is variable. Therefore, in step S1653, the sub CPU 91 executes processing for selecting the special cut-in execution timing.

For example, when a variable presentation pattern that progresses directly from a normal reach to an SPSP reach is set by the processing of step S1634 in FIG. 45 described above, when a special cut-in is executed, the timing immediately after the normal reach ends is selected as the execution timing for the special cut-in. This makes it possible to generate a special cut-in at a predetermined timing immediately after the normal reach ends and before it progresses to an SPSP reach, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), (L), and (M).

In addition, in this embodiment, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 13(A), the special cut-in is not limited to the timing immediately after the normal reach ends, but also during character reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach. A configuration that is executable is adopted. For this reason, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute a special cut-in when a variable effect pattern different from a variable effect pattern that directly develops from normal reach to SPSP reach is selected, the sub CPU 91 performs a special cut-in at a predetermined timing during character reach, SP reach One of the predetermined timing during SPSP reach and the predetermined timing during SPSP reach is selected as the special cut-in execution timing.

When the sub-CPU 91 executes the special cut-in performance pattern selection process in this manner, it stores information indicating the result of the selection process (the execution timing of the selected special cut-in) in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93 as special cut-in performance pattern setting information (step S1654). This special cut-in performance pattern setting information is included in a variable performance start command and sent to the image and audio control board 100, so that the special cut-in is executed at the execution timing selected by the sub-CPU 91.

[Character standby performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 48 is a detailed flowchart of the character standby effect pattern setting process in step S166 of Fig. 46. Following the special cut-in effect pattern setting process in step S165 of Fig. 46, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of character standby effect pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 48.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains a character standby effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1660). This character standby effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the character standby effect described above based on FIGS. 12 and 13, and is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process described above is performed. . On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a character standby effect random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 executes a character standby effect lottery (step S1661). The sub ROM 92 stores a random number (winning value) to be compared with the character standby effect random number, and the sub CPU 91 stores the character standby effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1660 in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute the character standby performance based on whether or not the character matches any of the random numbers (winning values).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains random numbers (winning values) for jackpots and random numbers (winning values) for losers as the above-mentioned random numbers (winning values) related to the character standby effect lottery. is remembered. When the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 uses the obtained and stored character standby effect random number to generate the jackpot. Compare with the random value (winning value) for On the other hand, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "lose" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the acquired and stored character standby effect random number is Compare with random number (winning value).

The sub-ROM 92 stores more random number values (winning values) for a jackpot in the character standby effect lottery than for a miss in the character standby effect lottery. For this reason, if the result of the first special pattern determination performed when the first special pattern starts to change in the normal game state is a "jackpot," it is more likely that a character standby effect will be executed, and conversely, if the result is a "miss," it is less likely that a character standby effect will be executed.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the character standby effect based on the lottery result in step S1661 (step S1662). Here, if it is determined that the character standby performance is not to be performed (step S1662: NO), a series of character standby performance pattern setting processing is completed, and the process proceeds to subjugation performance pattern setting processing in step S167, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the character standby effect (step S1662: YES), the special cut-in effect pattern information is set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1654 in FIG. It is determined whether or not to perform cut-in (step S1663). Here, if it is determined that the special cut-in is to be executed (step S1663: YES), the character standby effect pattern selection table for with special cut-in is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1664). Conversely, if it is determined that the special cut-in is not to be executed (step S1663: NO), the character standby effect pattern selection table for no special cut-in is read from the sub-ROM 92 and set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1665).

Then, the sub CPU 91 selects one performance pattern for the character standby performance by reading the performance pattern from the character standby performance pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 through the process of step S1664 or the process of step S1665. Performance pattern selection processing is executed (step S1666). Then, information indicating the selection result in step S1666 is stored in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as performance pattern setting information for character standby performance (step S1667). This character standby effect pattern setting information is included in the variable effect start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100, whereby the character standby effect is executed in the effect pattern selected by the sub CPU 91.

[Subjugation performance pattern setting process by the sub-control board 90]
Fig. 49 is a detailed flowchart of the defeat presentation pattern setting process in step S167 in Fig. 46. The sub-CPU 91 executes a series of defeat presentation pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 49 following the character standby presentation pattern setting process in step S166 in Fig. 46. This defeat presentation pattern setting process is a process for determining how each presentation shown in Fig. 17 will proceed in the pattern variation in which the above-mentioned defeat reach is performed.

The sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not to execute the subjugation reach based on whether or not a variable production pattern of the production symbol related to the subjugation reach has been set by the process of step S1634 in FIG. 45 (step S1670). . Here, if it is determined that the subjugation reach is not to be executed (step S1670: NO), the subjugation effect pattern setting process ends and the process proceeds to the chance effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 46) of step S168, which will be described later. .

On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that a defeat reach is to be executed (step S1670: YES), it determines whether or not the result of the current second special symbol determination is "10R sure change" based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command for the second special symbol determination received from the main control board 80 (step S1671). Here, when it determines that the result of the current second special symbol determination is "10R sure change" (step S1671: YES), it executes a presentation pattern selection process for the defeat/chasing rapid-fire presentation for 10R sure change (step S1672).

In this embodiment, as described above based on FIG. 17, "variable performance pattern A" and "variable performance pattern B" are prepared regarding the flow of each performance that constitutes the subjugation reach. Here, the "variable effect pattern A" is a variable effect pattern in which the effect progresses from a subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) to a subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)). On the other hand, "variable effect pattern B" changes from the effect of promoting the repeated pressing of the subjugation button (see Figure 17(C)) to the effect of promoting failure in subjugation (see Fig. 17(G)) and the effect of promoting repeated pressing of the pursuit button (see Fig. 17(K)). This is a variable effect pattern in which the effect progresses to the second pursuit success effect (see FIG. 17(O)).

Here, when comparing "variable performance pattern A" and "variable performance pattern B", "variable performance pattern B" has a larger number of performances that make up the subjugation reach, so "variable performance pattern A" It is clear that the overall performance takes longer than the execution of the subjugation reach.

In this embodiment, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "10R probability variation", there is a variation pattern A in which the variation time is the first time, and a variation pattern A in which the variation time is the first time. A variation pattern B, which is longer than , is prepared. In the process of step S1672, the sub CPU 91 specifies the variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80. Then, when the specified variation pattern is variation pattern A, "variation effect pattern A" is selected, and when the specified variation pattern is variation pattern B, "variation effect pattern B" is selected.

In addition, when the subjugation reach progresses with "variable effect pattern A", as described above based on FIG. The probability that the subjugation success performance (see FIG. 17(E)) and the 10R probability variable jackpot notification performance (see FIG. 17(F)) will be executed in response to the operation of the performance button 36 is 100%. On the other hand, when the subjugation reach progresses with "variable effect pattern B", after the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Fig. 17(C)), instead of the subjugation success effect (see Fig. 17(E)), It is necessary to execute a subjugation failure effect (see FIG. 17(G)). For this reason, when the subjugation reach progresses in "variable effect pattern B", the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)). Therefore, the subjugation success effect (see FIG. 17(E)) and the 10R probability-variable jackpot notification effect (see FIG. 17(F)) are never executed.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the second special symbol determination is not "10R sure change" (step S1671: NO), it determines whether the result of the second special symbol determination is "3R sure change" (step S1673). If the result of the second special symbol determination is "3R sure change" (step S1673: YES), it executes a pattern selection process for the 3R sure change defeat/chasing continuous hitting performance (step S1674). In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when executing a defeat reach in response to winning "3R sure change", only the variable performance pattern C in which the performance progresses from the defeat button continuous hitting promotion performance (see FIG. 17(C)) to the defeat failure performance (see FIG. 17(G)) and the pursuit button continuous hitting promotion performance (see FIG. 17(K)) to the first pursuit success performance (see FIG. 17(M)) and the 3R sure change big win notification performance is prepared. Therefore, in step S1674, the sub-CPU 91 executes a process to select this variable performance pattern C.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of this second special pattern determination is not "3R sure win" (step S1673: NO), i.e., if it is a "miss", it executes a process for selecting a performance pattern for the defeat/chasing rapid-fire performance for a miss (step S1675).

When the result of the second special pattern determination at the start of the change is a "miss" and a defeat reach is executed, "change presentation pattern D" and "change presentation pattern E" are prepared. "Change presentation pattern D" is a change presentation pattern in which the presentation progresses from a defeat button rapid-fire promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(C)) via a defeat failure presentation (see FIG. 17(G)) to a miss notification presentation (see FIG. 17(I)). "Change presentation pattern E" is a change presentation pattern in which the presentation progresses from a defeat button rapid-fire promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(C)) via a defeat failure presentation (see FIG. 17(G)) and a pursuit button rapid-fire promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(K)) to a pursuit failure presentation (see FIG. 17(Q)) and a miss notification presentation (see FIG. 17(R)).

In this way, since "variable presentation pattern D" and "variable presentation pattern E" are prepared for the case where the result of the second special pattern determination is "miss" and the subjugation reach is executed, the sub-CPU 91 selects "variable presentation pattern D" or "variable presentation pattern E" in the processing of the above step S1675.

After the sub-CPU 91 selects the presentation pattern for the defeat/chasing rapid-hit presentation by the processing of step S1672, step S1674, or step S1675, it sets information indicating the selected presentation pattern in the sub-RAM 93 as presentation pattern setting information for the defeat/chasing rapid-hit presentation (step S1676). This presentation pattern setting information for the defeat/chasing rapid-hit presentation is included in a presentation start command and sent to the image/sound control board 100 together with information indicating the presentation pattern change for the presentation symbol related to the defeat reach set by the processing of step S1634 in FIG. 45, and each presentation that constitutes the defeat reach will proceed with the presentation pattern set by the sub-CPU 91.

Note that, as is clear from the notation in FIG. 17, in the subjugation reach, the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see FIG. 17(C)) is always executed. Therefore, in the process of step S1676, performance pattern setting information including information indicating the valid period of the subjugation button continuous press promotion performance is set. Additionally, the performance progresses from the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17(C)) to the pursuit button repeated press promotion effect (see Figure 17(K)) via the subjugation failure effect (see Figure 17(G)). When the variable performance pattern is selected, performance pattern setting information is set which further includes information indicating the validity period of the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the determination result of the second special symbol determination may be "3R normal" (see FIG. 6(C)), but if the determination result is "3R normal" subjugation reach will not be executed. Therefore, in the subjugation performance pattern setting process shown in FIG. 49, the performance pattern selection process for the 3R normal subjugation/pursuit continuous hit performance is not executed.

[Chance performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the chance effect pattern setting process in step S168 of FIG. Following the subjugation effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 46, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of chance effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. This chance performance pattern setting process is a process for setting the performance pattern of the chance performance described above based on FIG. 23.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains a chance effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1680). This chance effect random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned chance effect based on FIGS. 23 and 24, and is incremented by 1 every time the above-described random number update process is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a chance production random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 executes a chance performance lottery (step S1681). The sub-ROM 92 stores a random number value (winning value) to be compared with the chance performance random number, and the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a chance performance based on whether or not the chance performance random number acquired and stored by the processing of step S1680 matches any of the random number values (winning values) stored in the sub-ROM 92.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores a random number value (winning value) for a jackpot and a random number value (winning value) for a miss as the random number values (winning values). When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, it compares the acquired and stored chance performance random number with the random number value (winning value) for a jackpot. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, it compares the acquired and stored chance performance random number with the random number value (winning value) for a miss.

The sub ROM 92 stores a larger number of random numbers as jackpot random numbers (winning values) related to the chance performance than random numbers for loses (winning values). For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", it is likely to be decided to execute a chance performance, and conversely, it is likely to be decided to execute a "loss". ”, it is difficult to make a decision if the chance effect is executed.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a chance performance based on the result of the lottery in step S1681 (step S1682). If it is determined that a chance performance is not to be executed (step S1682: NO), the series of chance performance pattern setting processes ends, and the process proceeds to the suggested performance pattern setting process in step S169, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the chance effect (step S1682: YES), it executes the effect pattern selection process for the chance effect (step S1683). The chance performance in this embodiment has only one type of performance, and is a preview performance whose execution timing is also fixed. Therefore, in step S1683, the sub CPU 91 executes a process of selecting one performance pattern prepared for the chance performance.

When the sub-CPU 91 executes the chance performance pattern selection process in this manner, it sets information indicating the selection result in a predetermined area of the sub-RAM 93 as chance performance pattern setting information (step S1684). This chance performance pattern setting information is included in a variable performance start command and sent to the image and sound control board 100, whereby the chance performance for which the performance pattern has been set by the sub-CPU 91 is executed.

[Suggested performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Fig. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the suggested performance pattern setting process in step S169 in Fig. 46. Following the chance performance pattern setting process in step S168 in Fig. 46, the sub-CPU 91 executes a series of suggested performance pattern setting processes exemplified in Fig. 51.

The sub-CPU 91 first obtains a suggested performance random number and stores it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1690). This suggested performance random number is a random number for determining whether or not to execute the suggested performance described above based on Figures 23 and 24, and is incremented by "1" each time the random number update process described above is performed. In response to this, the sub-CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time when it receives a variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state as the suggested performance random number, and stores it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 93.

Next, through the process of step S1684 in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the chance performance pattern setting information is set in the sub RAM 93, so that the chance performance is performed during the variable display of the current first special symbol. is executed (step S1691).

As described above based on FIGS. 23 and 24, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, a low suggestion performance can be combined within the same fluctuation as a chance performance, whereas a high suggestion performance can be combined within the same fluctuation as a chance performance. A configuration is adopted in which there is no possibility of compounding. Therefore, if it is determined that the chance effect will be executed during the current variable display of the first special symbol (step S1691: YES), in order to avoid performing the process for executing the highly suggestive effect, The process advances to step S1699, which will be described later.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the chance performance is not to be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol this time (step S1691: NO), the sub CPU 91 conducts a high suggestion performance lottery to determine whether or not to execute the high suggestion performance. (Step S1692). The sub ROM 92 stores a random value (winning value) to be compared with the suggestion effect random number regarding the highly suggestive effect, and the sub CPU 91 stores the suggestion effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1690 in the sub ROM 92. Based on whether or not it matches any of the stored random numbers (winning values), it is determined whether or not to execute the highly suggestive performance.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains random numbers (winning values) for jackpots and random numbers (winning values) for losses as the above-mentioned random numbers (winning values) related to the highly suggestive drawing lottery. is remembered. When the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 uses the acquired and stored suggestion effect random number for the jackpot. Compare with the random value (winning value). On the other hand, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "lose" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the acquired and stored suggestion effect random number is used as the random number for the above-mentioned loss. Compare with the numerical value (winning value).

In addition, the sub ROM 92 stores more random values (winning values) for jackpots related to the high suggestion effect lottery than random values (winning values) for losers related to the high suggestion effect lottery. . For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", it is likely to be decided to perform a highly suggestive performance, and conversely, " If it is a "loss", it is difficult to make a decision by performing a highly suggestive performance.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the highly suggestive performance based on the lottery result in step S1692 (step S1693). Here, if it is determined that the highly suggestive effect is not to be executed (step S1693: NO), the process proceeds to step S1699, as in the case where it is determined in step S1691 that the chance effect is to be executed.

On the other hand, if the sub-CPU 91 determines that a high suggestion effect is to be executed (step S1693: YES), it determines whether or not the result of this first special pattern determination is a "jackpot" based on the pattern setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80 (step S1694). If it determines that it is a "jackpot" (step S1694: YES), it reads out the presentation pattern selection table for the high suggestion effect for jackpots from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1695). Conversely, if it determines that it is not a "jackpot" (step S1694: NO), it reads out the presentation pattern selection table for the high suggestion effect for misses from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1696).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the performance pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, executes a highly suggestive performance pattern selection process to select a highly suggestive performance pattern (step S1697), and high-levels information indicating the selection result. It is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as suggested effect pattern setting information (step S1698). This highly suggestive performance pattern setting information is included in the variable performance start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100, whereby the highly suggestive performance is executed using the performance pattern selected by the sub CPU 91.

Although not shown in the figure, in the presentation pattern selection table for the high suggestion presentation for the jackpot, a different number of random numbers is associated with each of the first high suggestion presentation, the second high suggestion presentation, and the third high suggestion presentation, and when arranged from least to most associated random number values, the order is the first high suggestion presentation, the second high suggestion presentation, and the third high suggestion presentation.

Also, although not shown in the figure, in the presentation pattern selection table for high suggestion presentations for misses, a different number of random numbers is associated with each of the first high suggestion presentation, the second high suggestion presentation, and the third high suggestion presentation, and when arranged from least to most associated random number values, the order is the third high suggestion presentation, the second high suggestion presentation, and the first high suggestion presentation.

In the process of step S1697, the sub-CPU 91 selects one high suggestion effect by reading from the effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93 the type of high suggestion effect (first high suggestion effect, second high suggestion effect, or third high suggestion effect) that corresponds to the random number value that matches the suggestion effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1690.

In this embodiment, since the presentation pattern selection table for the high suggestion presentation for big wins and the presentation pattern selection table for the high suggestion presentation for losses have the above-mentioned characteristics with regard to the allocation of random number values, when the three types of high suggestion presentation are arranged in order from lowest to highest reliability of big wins, the order is the first high suggestion presentation, the second high suggestion presentation, and the third high suggestion presentation (see Figure 24).

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the chance production will be executed during the current variable display of the first special symbol (step S1691: YES), or if it determines that the highly suggestive production will not be executed (step S1693: NO). , performs the following processing regarding low suggestion effects.

That is, the sub CPU 91 performs a low suggestion effect lottery (step S1699). The sub ROM 92 stores a random value (winning value) to be compared with the suggestion effect random number regarding the low suggestion effect, and the sub CPU 91 stores the suggestion effect random number acquired and stored in the process of step S1690 in the sub ROM 92. It is determined whether or not to execute a low suggestion performance based on whether or not it matches any of the stored random numbers (winning values).

Although not shown in the figure, the sub-ROM 92 stores a random number value (winning value) for a jackpot and a random number value (winning value) for a miss as the random number value (winning value) related to the low suggestive performance lottery. When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, it compares the obtained and stored suggestive performance random number with the random number value (winning value) for a jackpot. On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that the result of the first special symbol determination is a "miss" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, it compares the obtained and stored suggestive performance random number with the random number value (winning value) for a miss.

In addition, the sub ROM 92 stores more random numbers as random numbers (winning values) for jackpots related to the low suggestion effect lottery than random numbers (winning values) for losers related to the low suggestion effect lottery. . For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", it is difficult to determine that a low suggestion performance will be executed; If it is a "loss", it is more likely to be decided to perform a low suggestion effect.

In this way, a low-suggestive performance is more likely to be executed in the case of a “lose” and difficult to be executed in the case of a “big hit,” so as illustrated in FIG. It is a very low preview performance that is difficult to lead to a jackpot.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 51, after executing the low suggestion effect lottery in step S1699, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the low suggestion effect based on the lottery result (step S1700). Here, if it is determined that the low suggestion effect is not to be executed (step S1700: NO), the series of suggestion effect pattern setting processing is completed and the process proceeds to step S171 in FIG. 46.

On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that a low suggestion effect is to be executed (step S1700: YES), it determines whether or not the result of this first special pattern determination is a "jackpot" based on the pattern setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80 (step S1701). If it determines that it is a "jackpot" (step S1701: YES), it reads out the presentation pattern selection table for the low suggestion effect for a jackpot from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1702). Conversely, if it determines that it is not a "jackpot" (step S1701: NO), it reads out the presentation pattern selection table for the low suggestion effect for a miss from the sub-ROM 92 and sets it in the sub-RAM 93 (step S1703).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, executes a low suggestion performance pattern selection process to select a performance pattern of low suggestion performance (step S1704), and stores information indicating the selection result. It is set in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93 as suggested effect pattern setting information (step S1705). This low suggestion performance pattern setting information is included in the variable performance start command and transmitted to the image and sound control board 100, whereby the low suggestion performance is executed with the performance pattern selected by the sub CPU 91.

Although not shown in the figure, in the presentation pattern selection table for the low suggestion presentation for the jackpot, a different number of random numbers is associated with each of the first low suggestion presentation, the second low suggestion presentation, and the third low suggestion presentation, and when arranged from least to most associated random number values, the order is the first low suggestion presentation, the second low suggestion presentation, and the third low suggestion presentation.

Also, although not shown in the figure, in the presentation pattern selection table for the low suggestion presentation for misses, a different number of random numbers is associated with each of the first low suggestion presentation, the second low suggestion presentation, and the third low suggestion presentation, and when arranged in order from least to most associated random number values, the order is the third low suggestion presentation, the second low suggestion presentation, and the first low suggestion presentation.

In the process of step S1704, the sub CPU 91 determines the type of low suggestion effect (first low suggestion effect, second low suggestion effect, or The first low-suggestive performance is selected by reading out the third low-suggestive performance) from the performance pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 93.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the distribution of random numbers, there are three types, since the performance pattern selection table for low suggestion performance for jackpot and the performance pattern selection table for low suggestion performance for loss have the above characteristics. When the low-suggestion performances are arranged in order of jackpot reliability from low to high, the order is the first low-suggestion performance, the second low-suggestion performance, and the third low-suggestion performance (see FIG. 24).

[Related performance pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the related effect pattern setting process in step S171 of FIG. 46. Following the process of step S171 in FIG. 46, the sub CPU 91 executes a series of related effect pattern setting processes illustrated in FIG. 52. This related performance pattern setting process allows the player to visually confirm a desired related performance by operating the operating lever 98 regarding the past related performance, present related performance, and future related performance described above based on FIGS. 14 to 16. This is the process to make it so.

The sub CPU 91 first obtains the related effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1720). This related performance random number determines whether or not to execute the related performance, in other words, whether to make the related performance executable in the related performance window 75 (see FIG. 14) in response to the operation of the operating lever 98 by the player. This is a random number for determining whether or not the value is set, and is incremented by 1 every time the random number update process described above is performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 obtains the count value at the time of receiving the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state as a related performance random number, and stores it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 performs a lottery for related effects (step S1721). The sub-ROM 92 stores a random number value (winning value) to be compared with the related effect random number, and the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a related effect based on whether or not the related effect random number acquired and stored by the processing of step S1720 matches any of the random number values (winning values) stored in the sub-ROM 92.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 contains random numbers (winning values) for jackpots and random numbers (winning values) for losers as the above-mentioned random numbers (winning values) related to the related effect lottery. , is memorized. When the sub CPU 91 specifies that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a "jackpot" based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, the sub CPU 91 uses the acquired and stored related performance random number for the jackpot. Compare with the random value (winning value). On the other hand, if it is determined that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is a "lose" based on the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80, the acquired and stored related effect random number is Compare with the numerical value (winning value).

Note that the sub ROM 92 stores a larger number of random numbers as random numbers (winning values) for jackpots related to the related effect lottery than random numbers (winning values) for losers related to the related effect lottery. For this reason, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is a "jackpot", it is likely to be decided to execute the related performance, and conversely, it will be determined that the related performance will be executed. ”, it is difficult to decide to execute the related performance.

If the result of the first special pattern determination performed at the start of the current first special pattern change is a "jackpot," steps S165 to S171 in FIG. 46 will be processed to set a preview performance pattern with a relatively high probability of winning, and these preview performance patterns with a relatively high probability of winning will be executed while the first special pattern change is being displayed.

On the other hand, as described above, if the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment performed at the start of the variation of the first special symbol is "jackpot", the related performance is likely to be executed, and the player By operating 98, it is easy to be provided with an opportunity to display information related to various preview performances with relatively high jackpot reliability in the related performance window 95. Therefore, the synergistic effect of various preview performances with relatively high jackpot reliability and related performances related to these preview performances can effectively raise players' expectations for the execution of the hit notification performance. It is possible to improve. Also, in the case of a "lose", if a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the related performance is likely to be in a state where it can be executed. Therefore, even in the case of a "lose" game, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect.

Next, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute a related effect based on the result of the lottery in step S1721 (step S1722). If it is determined that a related effect is not to be executed (step S1722: NO), the related effect pattern setting process ends and the process returns to step S165 in FIG. 46.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the related effects (step S1722: YES), it executes the past effect selection process (step S1723), the current effect selection process (step S1724), and the future effect selection process. (Step S1725).

As an example of the past performance selection process in step S1723, as described above with reference to FIG. 16(A), when past-related performance A related to performance A, past-related performance B related to performance B, and past-related performance C related to performance C can be executed, one example is a process of selecting performances A to C as shown in FIG. 16(A) from each performance (e.g., reach-established performance, reach performance, etc.) that constitutes the variable performance whose performance pattern is set by the processing of FIG. 45, and each performance whose performance pattern is set by the processing of steps S165 to S171 in FIG. 46.

In addition, the current performance selection process in step S1724 includes, for example, as described above with reference to FIG. 16(B), currently related performance A related to performance A, current related performance B related to performance B, In the case where the current related performance C related to the performance C is made executable, each performance (for example, a reach-to-reach performance, a reach-to-reach performance, etc.) constituting the variable performance for which the performance pattern has been set by the process of FIG. An example of this process is the process of selecting performances A to C in FIG. 16(B) from among the performances for which performance patterns have been set by the processes of steps S165 to S171 in FIG.

Further, as the future effect selection process in step S1725, for example, as described above based on FIG. 16(C), future related effect B related to effect B, future related effect C related to effect C, In the case where it is possible to execute the effects, each effect (for example, a reach effect, a reach effect, etc.) constituting the variable effect for which the effect pattern is set by the process of FIG. 45, and the processes of steps S165 to S171 in FIG. An example is the process of selecting performances B and C as shown in FIG. 16(C) from among the performances for which the performance patterns are set by.

Following the processing of step S1725, the sub-CPU 91 executes a related performance pattern selection process (step S1726). For example, if the three performances A, B, and C shown in FIG. 16(A) are selected by the past performance selection process of step S1723, in step S1726, the sub-CPU 91 selects the performance content of each of the past related performances A, B, and C, and executes a process of setting the executable period of each past related performance.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 91 selects the three effects A, B, and C shown in FIG. 16(B) through the current effect selection process in step S1724, then in step S1726, it selects the effect content for each of the currently related effects A, B, and C, and performs a process of setting the execution period for each currently related effect.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 91 selects two effects, effect B and effect C, shown in FIG. 16(C) through the future effect selection process in step S1725, in step S1726, it selects the effect content of each of future-related effects B and C, and performs a process of setting the execution period of each future-related effect.

In this way, when the sub CPU 91 executes the related effect pattern selection process regarding each effect of the past effect, the current effect, and the future effect in step S1726, the sub CPU 91 stores information indicating the selection result in the sub RAM 93 as related effect pattern setting information. It is stored in a predetermined area (step S1727).

In this embodiment, an example will be described in which all of the processes in steps S1723 to S1725 are executed so that the player can select any of the related effects by operating the operation lever 98 during the period in which the execution period of the past-related effects, the execution period of the present-related effects, and the execution period of the future-related effects overlap. In contrast to this, in other embodiments, only one or two of the processes in steps S1723 to S1725 may be executed.

[Operation reception processing by sub-control board 90]
53 to 55 are detailed flowcharts of the operation acceptance process in step S30 of FIG. 40. Following the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. 40, the sub CPU 91 executes the following process. That is, the sub CPU 91, for example, based on the related performance pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1727 in FIG. 52 and the elapsed time since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, It is determined whether or not the related performance is still valid (step S401).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the past-related performance is still valid (step S401: YES), the sub CPU 91 generates an operation signal that notifies that the lever button has been pressed while the operation lever 98 is tilted backward (towards the front). Based on whether or not has been input, it is determined whether or not the selection lever of the operation lever 98 has been operated (step S402). Here, if it is determined that the selection lever operation after the operation lever 98 has been performed (step S402: YES), a past related performance start command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S403). Specifically, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93, the effect content of the past related effect to be executed in response to the operation of the post-selection lever during the current valid period is specified, and the specified past related effect is executed. A past-related performance start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the execution of the past-related performance.

This past-related performance start command is sent to the image/sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process in step S40 of FIG. 40, and the image/sound control CPU 101 (and lamp CPU 121) executes processing based on the past-related performance start command, thereby starting the past-related performance instructed by the sub-CPU 91.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S403, when it determines that the past related performance is not within the valid period (step S401: NO), when it determines that the selection lever operation after the operation lever 98 is not performed (Step S402: NO), for example, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S1727 in FIG. 52 and the elapsed time since the variable display of the first special symbol started, It is determined whether or not the related performance is currently in the valid period (step S404).

When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the related performance is currently in an effective period (step S404: YES), it determines whether the operation lever 98 has been operated without direction selection based on whether an operation signal notifying that the lever button has been pressed without tilting the operation lever 98 has been input (step S405). Here, when it determines that the operation lever 98 has been operated without direction selection (step S405: YES), it sets a current related performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 (step S406). Specifically, based on the related performance pattern setting information set in the sub-RAM 93, it specifies the performance content of the current related performance to be executed in response to the lever operation without direction selection during the current effective period, and sets a current related performance start command in the sub-RAM 93 that instructs the execution of the specified current related performance.

This currently related performance start command is sent to the image/sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process in step S40 of FIG. 40, and the currently related performance instructed by the sub-CPU 91 is started by the image/sound control CPU 101 (and lamp CPU 121) executing processing based on the currently related performance start command.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S406 and determines that the related performance is not currently in the valid period (step S404: NO), the sub CPU 91 determines that the lever operation without direction selection of the operation lever 98 is not performed. (Step S405: NO), for example, based on the related effect pattern setting information set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of Step S1727 in FIG. 52 and the elapsed time since the variable display of the first special symbol was started. , it is determined whether or not the future-related presentation is still valid (step S407).

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the future-related effect is in effect (step S407: YES), the sub CPU 91 sends an operation signal notifying that the lever button has been pressed while the operation lever 98 is tilted forward (towards you). Based on whether the input has been made, it is determined whether or not the pre-selection lever of the operation lever 98 has been operated (step S408). Here, if it is determined that the previous selection lever of the operating lever 98 has been operated (step S408: YES), a future-related performance start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 (step S409). Specifically, based on the related performance pattern setting information set in the sub-RAM 93, the performance content of the future-related performance to be executed in response to the previous selection lever operation during the current valid period is specified, and the specified future-related performance is executed. A future-related performance start command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct the execution of .

This future-related performance start command is sent to the image/sound control board 100 (and lamp control board 120) by the command sending process in step S40 of FIG. 40, and the image/sound control CPU 101 (and lamp CPU 121) executes processing based on the future-related performance start command, thereby starting the future-related performance instructed by the sub-CPU 91.

When the sub-CPU 91 executes the processing of step S409, when it determines that the future-related presentation is not in effect (step S407: NO), or when it determines that the forward selection lever operation of the operation lever 98 has not been performed (step S408: NO), as illustrated in FIG. 54, it determines whether or not setting information indicating that the defeat reach's variable presentation pattern is "variable presentation pattern A" is stored in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S1676 described above (step S411). Here, if it determines that setting information indicating that the defeat reach's variable presentation pattern is "variable presentation pattern A" is not stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S411: NO), the processing proceeds to step S429 in FIG. 55 described below.

When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the setting information indicating that the variable presentation pattern of the subjugation reach is "variable presentation pattern A" is stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S411: YES), it determines whether or not the effective period for the subjugation button rapid-hit promotion presentation (see FIG. 17(C)) is in progress (step S412). Specifically, in this embodiment, presentation pattern setting information including information indicating the effective period for the subjugation button rapid-hit promotion presentation is set in the sub-RAM 93 by the processing of step S1676 in FIG. 49, which is performed at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol that executes the subjugation reach. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not the effective period for the subjugation button rapid-hit promotion presentation is in progress based on the information indicating the effective period and the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol that executes the subjugation reach.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that the valid period for the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance is still in effect (step S412: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the first performance button 35 has been operated (step S413). Here, if it is determined that the first effect button 35 has not been operated (step S413: NO), the process proceeds to step S421, which will be described later.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the first performance button 35 has been operated (step S412: YES), the current operation of the first performance button 35 is the first operation during the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance. It is determined whether or not (step S414). Here, if it is determined that this is the first operation (step S414: YES), as described above based on FIG. ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the current operation of the first performance button 35 is not the first operation during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance (step S414: NO), the above-described operation based on FIG. 18(A) is performed. As such, a subjugation success effect lottery is executed with a 10% probability of winning (step S416).

Then, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the subjugation success effect lottery in step S415 or step S416 has been won (step S417). Here, if it is determined that one of the subjugation success effect drawings has been won (step S417: YES), the validity period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion effect is terminated (step S418), and the above-mentioned based on FIG. 17(E) is performed. The subjugation success effect is executed (step S419). Specifically, a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct execution of the subjugation success effect.

If the sub-CPU 91 determines that the first effect button 35 has not been operated (step S413: NO), it determines whether or not the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S421). If it determines that the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S421: YES), it determines whether or not the operation is the first operation of the second effect button 36 during the valid period for the defeat button rapid-hit promotion effect (step S422).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the operation of the second performance button 36 is the first operation of the second performance button 36 during the valid period related to the subjugation button repeated press promotion performance (step S422: YES), the sub CPU 91 performs the operation shown in FIG. ), as described above, a subjugation success effect lottery with a 100% probability of winning is executed (step S423). In this way, since there is a 100% probability of winning the subjugation success effect drawing here, the validity period is ended in the same way as the process in step S418 (step S424), and the subjugation success effect is drawn as in the process in step S419. Execute (step S425).

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when the defeat reach of variable presentation pattern A is executed, a configuration is adopted in which a defeat success presentation is always executed in response to the first operation of the second presentation button 36 during the valid period for the defeat button rapid-hit promotion presentation. Therefore, unlike the above based on FIG. 18(A), for example, if it is determined that the second presentation button 36 is operated for the first time (step S422: YES), the processing from step S424 onwards may be executed without executing the defeat success presentation lottery in step S423.

On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that the setting information indicating that the variable presentation pattern of the defeat reach is "variable presentation pattern A" is not stored in the sub-RAM 93 (step S411: NO), it determines whether or not the effective period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion presentation is in progress, as illustrated in FIG. 55 (step S429). Specifically, in this embodiment, the processing of step S1676 in FIG. 49, which is performed at the start of the variable display of the second special symbol in which the defeat reach is executed, sets presentation pattern setting information including information indicating the effective period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion presentation in the sub-RAM 93 in addition to information indicating the effective period for the defeat button rapid-hit promotion presentation. Therefore, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not the effective period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion presentation is in progress, based on the latter information indicating the effective period and the elapsed time since the variable display of the second special symbol in which the defeat reach is executed started.

When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the chase button rapid-hit promotion effect is in effect (step S429: YES), it determines whether the first effect button 35 has been operated (step S430). When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the first effect button 35 has been operated (step S430: YES), it determines whether the result of the second special pattern determination performed at the start of the current second special pattern change is "10R sure change" based on the pattern setting information included in the change start command received from the main control board 80 (step S431). Here, if it is determined that it is not "10R sure change" (step S431: NO), the process proceeds to step S439 described below.

When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game is a "10R sure hit" (step S431: YES), it determines whether or not the current operation of the first effect button 35 is the first operation during the valid period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion effect (step S432). If it determines that the current operation is the first operation (step S432: YES), it executes a lottery for the second pursuit successful effect, which has a 10% chance of winning, as described above based on FIG. 18 (B) (step S433). On the other hand, when it determines that the current operation of the first effect button 35 is not the first operation during the valid period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion effect (step S432: NO), it executes a lottery for the second pursuit successful effect, which has a 15% chance of winning, as described above based on FIG. 18 (B) (step S434).

Then, the sub-CPU 91 determines whether or not the second pursuit success performance lottery of step S433 or step S434 has been won (step S435). If it determines that either of the second pursuit success performance lotteries has been won (step S435: YES), the effective period for the pursuit button rapid-hit promotion performance is ended (step S436), and the second pursuit success performance described above is executed based on FIG. 17 (O) (step S437). Specifically, a command instructing the execution of the second pursuit success performance is set in the sub-RAM 93.

When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game is not a "10R sure-win" (step S431: NO), it determines whether or not the game is a "3R sure-win" (step S439). When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the game is a "3R sure-win" (step S439: YES), it determines whether or not the current operation of the first performance button 35 is the first operation during the valid period related to the pursuit button successive tapping promotion performance (step S440). When the sub-CPU 91 determines that the current operation of the first performance button 35 is the first operation during the valid period related to the pursuit button successive tapping promotion performance (step S440), it executes a first pursuit successful performance lottery with a 5% probability of winning, as described above based on FIG. 18 (C) (step S441). On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that the current operation of the first performance button 35 is not the first operation during the valid period related to the pursuit button successive tapping promotion performance (step S440: NO), that is, when the operation is the second or subsequent operation, it executes a first pursuit successful performance lottery with a 20% probability of winning, as described above based on FIG. 18 (C) (step S442).

Then, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the first pursuit success effect lottery in step S441 or step S442 has been won (step S443). Here, if it is determined that one of the first pursuit successful performance drawings has been won (step S443: YES), the validity period related to the pursuit button repeated press promotion performance is ended (step S444), and based on FIG. 17(M) Then, the first pursuit success effect described above is executed (step S445). Specifically, a command is set in the sub-RAM 93 to instruct execution of the first pursuit success effect.

[Interrupt Processing by the Image and Sound Control Board 100]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the image acoustic control board 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 56. Here, Fig. 56 is a flow chart illustrating an example of the interrupt processing executed in the image acoustic control board 100. During normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or off, the image acoustic control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in Fig. 56 at regular intervals (e.g., 33 milliseconds).

First, the image-acoustic control CPU 101 executes an image display control process for controlling image display on the display screen 70 based on commands received from the sub-control board 90 (step S71). This image display control process will be described in detail later based on FIG. 57.

Following the process of step S71, the image sound control CPU 101 executes a production sound output control process for outputting various production sounds from the speaker 38 in synchronization with the screen display performed on the display screen 70 or asynchronously. (Step S72).

Following the processing of step S72, the image/sound control CPU 101 executes a data transmission control process (step S73). Specifically, data related to the image/sound control performed in the image/sound control board 100 is transmitted to the sub-control board 90. In response, the sub-control board 90 transfers the data received from the image/sound control board 100 to the lamp control board 120. This controls the frame lamps 37, panel lamps 5, movable decorative members 14, etc. to be synchronized with the performance performed by the display screen 70 and speaker 38.

[Image display control processing by image and sound control board 100]
FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. The image and sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711). Here, if it is determined that no command has been received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the image and sound control CPU 101 determines that a command from the sub-control board 90 has been received (step S711: YES), it sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it determines how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, creates a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 104, and stores it in a predetermined area of the control RAM 103. (step S713), and set the display list in the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). By the VDP 104 executing the drawing process based on the display list set in the display list storage area, the effect display instructed by the sub-control board 90 is realized.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is as follows:
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
A winning notification effect for notifying the player that the special game is executed and that the determination means has determined that the special game is executed, a first expectation effect for making the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed, and a second expectation effect for making the player expect that the winning notification effect will be executed,
During execution of the first expected performance, there are times when the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content, and times when the performance content of the first expected performance does not change from the first performance content,
The first probability that the second expected performance will start while the performance content of the first expected performance has not changed from the first performance content to the second performance content, and the second probability that the second expected performance will start after the performance content of the first expected performance has changed from the first performance content to the second performance content, are different from each other.

According to this gaming machine, the first probability that the second expected performance is started before the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content, and the performance content of the first expected performance are and a second probability that the second expected performance is started after changing from the first performance content to the second performance content are different from each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who expects the second expected performance to be executed pay attention to whether or not the content of the first expected performance changes, and the first expected performance and the second expected performance Due to the synergistic effect, it is possible to obtain high performance effects.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1,
The second probability is higher than the first probability.

According to this gaming machine, the second expected performance is more likely to start after the performance content of the first expected performance has changed from the first performance content to the second performance content, compared to before the performance content of the first expected performance has changed from the first performance content to the second performance content. Therefore, a player who expects the second expected performance to be executed can be made to expect that the performance content of the first expected performance will change from the first performance content to the second performance content, and by changing the performance content of the first expected performance, it is possible to effectively increase the player's anticipation for the execution of the second expected performance.

(Reference Invention 2)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is as follows:
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance based on the result of the determination includes a first performance executed at a first timing and a second performance executed at a second timing different from the first timing,
The performance control means includes:
The device is characterized in that, in response to a first operation by a player, a first related performance related to the first performance is executed, and, in response to a second operation by the player, a second related performance related to the second performance is executed.

According to this gaming machine, if the player performs a first operation, a first related effect related to the first effect is executed, and if the player performs a second operation, a second related effect related to the second effect is executed. Therefore, the player can arbitrarily obtain information about either the first or second effect by changing the operation, and it is possible to execute an operation-responsive effect with a higher presentation effect than when the operation-responsive effect is fixed regardless of the operation.

(Reference Invention 3)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is as follows:
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
Based on the result of the determination, a first operation prompting effect is executed to prompt the player to perform a first operation during a first period, and a second operation prompting effect is executed to prompt the player to perform a second operation during a second period after the first period,
execute one of a first success effect or a first failure effect in response to the first operation being performed during the first period;
execute one of a second success effect or a second failure effect in response to the second operation being performed during the second period;
The device is characterized in that, when the first success performance is executed, neither the second success performance nor the second failure performance is executed, and, when the first failure performance is executed, either the second success performance or the second failure performance can be executed.

According to this gaming machine, when the first failure effect is executed, the second operation promotion effect is executed after that, and the second operation during the second period in which the second operation promotion effect is executed. Accordingly, a second success effect may be executed. In this way, even if the first failure performance is executed, the second success performance may be executed after that, so by executing the first failure performance, the player may feel that the success performance will be executed. It is possible to easily and effectively suppress the problem of a significant drop in expectations.

(Reference Invention 4)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is as follows:
A gaming machine including a game control unit that controls the progress of a game and a performance control unit that controls a performance,
The game control unit includes:
An acquisition means for acquiring a plurality of pieces of information including acquisition information and type information;
a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired information acquired by the acquisition means;
a determination means for determining a type of the special game based on the type information acquired together with the acquired information used in the determination when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
a special game execution means for executing the special game determined by the determination means;
a game control means for controlling a game in any one of a plurality of game states including a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous to a player than the first game state;
A reservation means capable of reserving the right to make the judgment;
a pre-determination means for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be executed before the determination is made with respect to the right reserved by the reservation means;
A transmission means for transmitting information to the performance control unit,
The performance control unit includes:
a receiving means for receiving the information transmitted by the transmitting means;
a performance execution means for executing a performance based on the information received by the receiving means,
The acquired information acquired by the acquiring means includes at least first acquired information and second acquired information,
The determination means is
determining that the special game is to be executed when the first acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means in the first gaming state, and determining that the special game is not to be executed when the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means;
determining that the special game is to be executed in both cases where the first acquisition information is acquired and where the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means in the second gaming state;
The game control unit includes:
a special game information acquisition means for acquiring special game information capable of identifying a type of special game based on the type information acquired by the acquisition means together with the second acquisition information when the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means;
The transmitting means is
When the second acquisition information is acquired by the acquisition means, pre-determination information indicating a result of the pre-determination by the pre-determination means and the special game information acquired by the special game information acquisition means can be transmitted to the performance control unit,
The performance execution means includes:
The present invention is characterized in that a predetermined presentation can be executed based on the advance judgment information and the special game information received by the receiving means.

According to this gaming machine, when second acquisition information is acquired that determines that a special game will not be executed in the first game state, but that a special game will be executed in the second game state, special game information capable of identifying the type of special game is transmitted to the performance control unit in addition to pre-determination information indicating the result of the pre-determination. Therefore, even in cases where it is pre-determined that a special game will not be executed because it is in the first game state at the time the determination by the determination means is withheld, but it is determined that the special game will be executed because it is in the second game state when the determination by the determination means is actually made, the special game information is transmitted, so that an effective predetermined performance based on the pre-determination information and the special game information can be executed.

(Reference Invention 5)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is as follows:
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, causing a predetermined special symbol display means to variably display a special symbol and then causing a special symbol indicating the result of the determination to be stationary displayed;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when a special symbol indicating that the determination means has determined that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display means;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
A variable performance is executed to variably display a performance pattern in association with the variable display of the special pattern, and a stop performance is executed to stop and display a performance pattern showing the result of the judgment in association with the stop display of the special pattern,
The stop effect includes a first stop effect notifying that the special game will be executed, and a second stop effect notifying that the special game will not be executed,
The performance control means includes:
The second stop effect, which notifies the player that the first stop effect will be executed, is capable of being executed.

However, if the second stop effect (notifying that a special game will not be played) is repeatedly played for a long period of time without the first stop effect (notifying that a special game will be played) being played, the player's anticipation of the special game being played will decrease, and as a result, there is a concern that the player will feel uncomfortable. In response to this, with the above gaming machine, the second stop effect may be played, which notifies the player that the first stop effect (notifying that a special game will be played) will be played. Therefore, by playing the second stop effect, the player can be made to expect that a special game will be played, and the above-mentioned discomfort felt by the player can be reduced.

(Reference Invention 6)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is as follows:
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a symbol display control means for, when the determination is made, displaying a symbol on a predetermined symbol display means in a variable manner and then displaying a symbol indicating the result of the determination in a stationary manner;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when a symbol indicating that the special game is to be executed is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means by the determination means;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
Based on the result of the determination, a winning notification effect for notifying the player that the special game will be executed, an expectation effect for expecting that the winning notification effect will be executed, and a suggestion effect for suggesting that there is a possibility that the winning notification effect will be executed can be executed.
The suggestive effects include a low suggestive effect that suggests that the possibility is relatively low, and a high suggestive effect that suggests that the possibility is relatively high.
The performance control means includes:
When the expected performance and the suggestive performance are executed during the display of the variation of the pattern, a suggestive performance control is executed to execute the low suggestive performance without executing the high suggestive performance during the display of the variation of the pattern,
The method is characterized in that the probability that the expected performance and the low suggestion performance are executed is higher than the probability that the low suggestion performance is executed without executing the expected performance.

A high-suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that a winning notification performance will be executed, whereas a low-suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that the probability that a winning notification performance will be executed is relatively low. This is a performance that suggests this. For this reason, the player expects the high suggestion performance to be executed more than the low suggestion performance, and if the low suggestion performance is frequently executed without the high suggestion performance being executed, the hit notification performance There is a concern that players' expectations for the execution of the game will be significantly lowered. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described above, when the expected performance is executed while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the high suggestion performance is not executed and the low suggestion performance is executed while the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. . Furthermore, it is more likely that the expected performance and the low suggestion performance are executed (the winning notification performance is executed) than when the expected performance is not executed and the low suggestion performance is executed. For this reason, by executing the hit notification performance in response to the execution of the low suggestion performance in conjunction with the expected performance, it is said that the low suggestion performance is a performance that cannot be expected to be executed. In addition to improving the player's impression, low-suggestive performances can give players a good impression that, when combined with expected performances, it is a performance that can be expected to execute a winning notification performance, and low-suggestive performances are frequently performed. It is possible to easily and effectively suppress the above-mentioned problem in which the player's expectations for the execution of the winning notification effect are significantly lowered due to the execution of the winning notification effect.

The above reference inventions 1 to 6 may be combined.

[Modified example]
In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a type of pachinko game machine called a so-called V-ST machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a type of pachinko game machine called a variable loop type. The present invention may be applied to other gaming machines such as a single type pachinko gaming machine called a so-called ST machine, and a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixed type pachinko gaming machine.

Further, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized even with other configurations and operation modes. Furthermore, the order of processing, set values, random values, threshold values used for determination, etc. in the above-described flowchart are merely examples, and the present invention may be applied to other orders or values as long as they do not depart from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say, it is possible to achieve this. The drawings and the like illustrated in the above embodiments are merely examples, and other aspects may be used.

1 Gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), 7 Image display device, 21 First start port, 22 Second start port, 23 Opening/closing member, 26 First large prize port, 28 Second large prize port, 41 First special symbol display device, 42 Second special symbol display device, 70 Display screen, 75 Related performance window, 76 Past window, 77 Current window, 78 Future window, 80 Main control board, 81 Main CPU, 90 Sub control board, 91 Sub CPU, 98 Operation lever, 100 Image and sound control board, 101 Image and sound control CPU, 211 First start port sensor, 221 Second start port sensor, 261 First large prize port sensor, 262 First large prize port solenoid, 281 Second large prize port sensor, 282 Second large prize port solenoid, 283 V prize port sensor, 284 Discharge port sensor, 285 Slide member, 286V entry port solenoid, 287V entry port.

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player;
a special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines that the special game is to be executed;
A performance control means for controlling the performance,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a winning notification effect that notifies the player that the determination means has determined that the special game will be executed, a first expectation effect that creates an expectation that the winning notification effect will be executed, a second expectation effect that creates an expectation that the winning notification effect will be executed, a first reach effect, a second reach effect in which the winning notification effect is more likely to be executed than the first reach effect, and a third reach effect in which the winning notification effect is more likely to be executed than the second reach effect,
During execution of the first expected performance, there are a first time when the performance content of the first expected performance does not change from the first performance content, a second time when the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content and does not change thereafter to a third performance content, and a third time when the performance content of the first expected performance changes from the first performance content to the second performance content and then changes to the third performance content,
a second probability that the second expected effect will start at the third time is higher than a first probability that the second expected effect will start at the first time ;
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to perform a performance control such that the first reach performance is executed at the first time, the second reach performance is executed at the second time, and the second expectation performance and the third reach performance are executed at the third time ,
The second expected effect is a suggestive effect that suggests that the third reach effect will be executed,
The performance control means includes:
When the suggestion performance is executed, the third reach performance is executed without fail thereafter.
The gaming machine is characterized in that, at the first time, it is possible to execute the suggested performance after starting the first reach performance, and at the second time, it is possible to execute the suggested performance after starting the second reach performance.

Images